2k06xlr

2006 Cadillac XLR Owner Manual M
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Navigation System .......................................... 4-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2 Overview .................................................. 4-2
Safety Belts .............................................. 1-5 Features and Controls .............................. 4-10
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-18 Navigation Audio System ........................... 4-51
Airbag System ......................................... 1-32 Voice Recognition .................................... 4-75
Restraint System Check ............................ 1-45 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ........ 5-2
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys ........................................................ 2-2 Towing ................................................... 5-37
Doors and Locks Service and Appearance Care .......................... 6-1
....................................... 2-9
Service ..................................................... 6-3
Windows ................................................. 2-15
Fuel ......................................................... 6-5
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-18
Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 6-10
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-20 Rear Axle ............................................... 6-42
Mirrors .................................................... 2-34 Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 6-43
OnStar® System ...................................... 2-37 Bulb Replacement .................................... 6-45
Universal Home Remote System ................ 2-39 Windshield Replacement ........................... 6-46
Storage Areas ......................................... 2-44 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 6-46
Retractable Hardtop .................................. 2-46 Tires ...................................................... 6-47
Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-56 Appearance Care ..................................... 6-71
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Vehicle Identification ................................. 6-79
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Electrical System ...................................... 6-80
Climate Controls ...................................... 3-41 Capacities and Specifications ..................... 6-86
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-48 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 7-1
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-64 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 7-2
Trip Computer ......................................... 3-82 Customer Assistance and Information .............. 8-1
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-82 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 8-13
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC, P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and the name XLR
are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation. How to Use This Manual
This manual includes the latest information at the time Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
after that time to the product without notice. For vehicles is done, it can help you learn about the features
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car together in the owner manual to explain things.
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if
it is needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 06XLR A First Printing 2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
ii
Index In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
A good place to quickly locate information about the the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is you or others could be hurt.
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found. You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
Safety Warnings and Symbols symbol means “Do Not,”
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. “Do Not do this” or “Do Not
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about let this happen.”
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices: The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
Notice: These mean there is something that could the text describing the operation or information
damage your vehicle. relating to a specific component, control, message,
A notice tells about something that can damage the gage, or indicator.
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. component, gage, or indicator, reference the
But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the following topics:
damage.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors • Features and Controls in Section 2
or in different words. • Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. • Climate Controls in Section 3
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
Power Seats ..................................................1-2 (LATCH) ..................................................1-27
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-2 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Heated and Cooled Seats ................................1-3 Passenger Seat Position ............................1-28
Power Reclining Seatback ...............................1-4 Airbag System ...............................................1-32
Safety Belts .....................................................1-5 Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-34
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-5 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-37
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ........1-9 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-38
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-10 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-38
Driver Position ..............................................1-10 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........1-39
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-16 Passenger Sensing System ............................1-40
Passenger Position .......................................1-17 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-44
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-17 Adding Equipment to Your
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-17 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-44
Child Restraints .............................................1-18 Restraint System Check ..................................1-45
Older Children ..............................................1-18 Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-45
Infants and Young Children ............................1-20 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-23 After a Crash ............................................1-46
1-1
Front Seats • Slide the control forward or rearward to move the
entire seat forward or rearward.
Power Seats • Press the vertical control rearward to recline the

seatback. Press the vertical control forward to
The power seat controls raise the seatback. See Power Reclining Seatback
are located on the on page 1-4.
outboard sides of both
the driver’s and the Power Lumbar
passenger’s seats.
The driver’s and
passenger’s seatback
lumbar support switches
are located on the
outboard sides of
the seats.
• Move the front of the horizontal control up or down

to adjust the front portion of the cushion.
• Move the rear of the horizontal control up or down
to adjust the rear portion of the cushion.
1-2
Use the power seat controls first to get the proper Heated and Cooled Seats
position, then continue with the lumbar adjustment.
Use the top lumbar switch to adjust support to the The buttons for the heated and cooled seats are located
middle seatback and the bottom lumbar switch to adjust on the climate control system.
support to the lower seatback. Press the front of the
switch to increase support and the rear of the switch to
( (Heated/Cooled Seat): Press this button to turn the
decrease support. feature on. The button on the left controls the driver’s
seat and the button on the right controls the passenger’s
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as seat. Each press of the button will take you to a
it may during long trips, so should the position of different setting. The settings available in order are
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed. HI HEAT, LO HEAT, OFF, HI COOL, LO COOL
and OFF. You will be able to feel the temperature
change in a few minutes.
The feature will automatically turn off when the vehicle
is turned off.
1-3
Power Reclining Seatback
The vertical power seat control described earlier allows {CAUTION:
the seatback to recline. See Power Seats on page 1-2
for more information. Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is

moving.
1-4
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
collision, people riding in these areas are more
not do with safety belts.
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
{CAUTION: belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt, Your vehicle has a light
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit that comes on as a
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. reminder to buckle up.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the See Safety Belt Reminder
same crash, you might not be if you are Light on page 3-50.
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger’s belt is
fastened properly too.
1-5
In most states and all Canadian provinces, the law says Why Safety Belts Work
to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on

wheels.
1-6
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-7
The person keeps going until stopped by something. or the instrument panel...
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-8
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to

wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
or the safety belts! in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, system ever offered for sale has required the use of
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
safety belts make such good sense.
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-9
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from Driver Position
home, why should I wear safety belts?
Lap-Shoulder Belt
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
accident — even one that isn’t your fault — you it properly.
and your passenger can be hurt. Being a good 1. Close the door.
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
control, such as bad drivers. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-18
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-20. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection. 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your Do not let it get twisted.
vehicle has. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
We will start with the driver position. across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-10
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-17.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
shoulder belt. over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-11
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly

as much protection this way.
1-12
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-13
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-14
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-15
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-16
Passenger Position Safety Belt Extender
To learn how to wear the passenger’s safety belt If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
properly, see Driver Position on page 1-10. you should use it.
The passenger’s safety belt works the same way as But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing. If you order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way, order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
you will engage the child restraint locking feature. the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
start again. use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
Safety Belt Pretensioners belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver that comes with the extender.
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the buckle end of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-46.
1-17
Child Restraints Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
Older Children lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-18
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,

but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
1-19
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children

Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
2 they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
{CAUTION: Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1-20
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-21
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints? {CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Newborn infants need complete support,
Selection of a particular restraint should take including support for the head and neck.
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
and age but also whether or not the restraint will neck is weak and its head weighs so much
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
be used. an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
For most basic types of child restraints, there are the restraint, so the crash forces can be
many different models available. When purchasing a distributed across the strongest part of an
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a Infants always should be secured in
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle appropriate infant restraints.
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-22
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-23
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the seating surface against the back of the infant. the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
The harness system holds the infant in place and, with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-24
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within the
child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, Then follow the instructions for the restraint.
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point You may find these instructions on the restraint
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out itself or in a booklet, or both.
the window.
1-25
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
in the Vehicle the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
{CAUTION: copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
crash if the child restraint is not properly the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle Securing the Child Within the
using the vehicle’s safety belt, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and Child Restraint
also the instructions in this manual. There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint the infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch.
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems The five-point harness system has two shoulder
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the straps, two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt. A child can take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which
properly secured in the vehicle. rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a
wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.
1-26
Some child restraints with a top tether are designed to
be used whether the top tether is anchored or not.
{CAUTION: Other child restraints require that the top tether
be anchored. A national or local law may require that
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a the top tether be anchored.
crash if the child is not properly secured in the In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
secured, following the instructions that came attached.
with that restraint. Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or top tether
anchors to secure a child restraint with the LATCH
system. If a national or local law requires that your top
Because there are different systems, it is important to tether be anchored, do not use a child restraint in
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint. this vehicle because a top tether cannot be properly
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not anchored. You must use the safety belts to secure your
properly secured in the child restraint. child restraint in this vehicle, unless a national or
local law requires that the top tether be anchored.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Refer to your child restraint instructions and instructions
in this manual for securing a child restraint using the
Children (LATCH) vehicle’s safety belts.
Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part of
the LATCH system, your child restraint may have
lower attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCH
system can help hold the child restraint in place during
driving or in a crash. Some vehicles have lower
and/or top tether anchors designed to secure a child
restraint with lower attachments and/or a top tether.
1-27
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Passenger Seat Position {CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
In addition, your vehicle has the passenger sensing
seriously injured or killed if the right front
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
side impact airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant back of the rear facing child restraint would be
seat or a small child in a forward-facing child restraint very close to the inflating airbag. Be sure the
or booster seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing airbag is off before using a rear-facing child
System on page 1-40 and Passenger Airbag Status restraint in the right front seat position.
Indicator on page 3-52 for more information on
Even though the passenger sensing system is
this including important safety information.
designed to turn off the passenger’s airbags if
the system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with a rear
seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
1-28
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the
the passenger’s position, move the seat as far back instructions say.
as it will go before securing the forward-facing 1. Your vehicle has airbags. See Passenger Sensing
child restraint. See Power Seats on page 1-2. System on page 1-40. General Motors recommends
There is no top tether anchor at the passenger’s seating that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if rear seat, even if the airbags are off. If your child
a national or local law requires that the top tether restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as
be anchored or if the instructions that come with the far back as it will go before securing the child
child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored. restraint in this seat. See Power Seats on page 1-2.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) When the passenger sensing system has turned
on page 1-27. off the right front passenger’s airbags, the off
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the should light and stay lit when the vehicle is
instructions that came with the child restraint. started. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-52.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-29
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock.
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-30
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the inside
rearview mirror will be lit and stay lit when the
vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, If the on indicator is still lit, do not secure a child
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the restraint in this vehicle and check with your dealer.
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
to use your knee to push down on the child belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be adult or larger child passenger.
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
1-31
Airbag System
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver, a frontal
airbag for the passenger, a side impact airbag for the
driver, and a side impact airbag for the passenger. Frontal airbags for the driver and passenger are
designed to deploy in moderate to severe
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
frontal and near frontal crashes. They are not
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their designed to inflate in rollover, rear crashes,
job and comply with federal regulations. or in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may
Here are the most important things to know about the
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
airbag system:
more forceful airbags have provided in the past.
Side impact airbags for the driver and
{CAUTION: passenger are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe crashes where something hits the
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash side of your vehicle. They are not designed to
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
during a crash helps reduce your chance of belt properly — whether or not there is an
hitting things inside the vehicle or being airbag for that person.
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. Airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
1-32
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
with great force, faster than the blink of an any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag, injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
as you would be if you were leaning forward, belts offer the best protection for adults, but
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help not for young children and infants. Neither the
keep you in position for airbag inflation before vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
and during a crash. Always wear your safety system is designed for them. Young children
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver and infants need the protection that a child
should sit as far back as possible while still restraint system can provide. Always secure
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
should not lean on or sleep against the door. see Older Children on page 1-18 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-20.
1-33
There is an airbag Where Are the Airbags?
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for

malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-51
for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the

steering wheel.
1-34
The passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel The driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of the
on the passenger’s side. driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-35
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path of
an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not
put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Do not let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact airbag.
The passenger’s side impact airbag is in the side of the

passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
1-36
When Should an Airbag Inflate? Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment vehicle hits a moving object.
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account • If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
events and are used to predict how severe a crash if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
the direction of the impact and how quickly your • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
vehicle slows down. airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags, than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity. The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers,
which help the sensing system distinguish between a rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags The side impact airbags are intended to inflate in
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
move or deform, the threshold level for the reduced with specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are
deployment is about 12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and not intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
the threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to rollovers or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is
24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h). (The threshold level can vary, intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that
however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be is struck.
somewhat above or below this range.)
1-37
Vehicles with dual stage airbags are also equipped with How Does an Airbag Restrain?
seat position sensors which enable the sensing
system to monitor the position of the driver’s and In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
passenger’s seats. The seat position sensor provides even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
information which is used to determine if the airbags the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment. collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
airbag should have inflated simply because of the provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how frontal airbags would not help you in many types
quickly the vehicle slows down. For side impact of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
airbags, inflation is determined by the location and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
severity of the impact. is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, the airbag frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules side collisions for side impact airbags.
inside the steering wheel, the instrument panel, and
the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door.
1-38
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
some people may not even realize the airbag inflated. inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
Some components of the airbag module — the steering window or a door. If you experience breathing
wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for problems following an airbag deployment, you
the passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest to
should seek medical attention.
the door for the driver’s and passenger’s side impact
airbags — may be hot for a short time. The parts of the
bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the passenger airbag.
windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it • Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
stop people from leaving the vehicle. airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for your
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
{CAUTION: crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
air. This dust could cause breathing problems • Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
for people with a history of asthma or other diagnostic module which records information after a
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe Recorders on page 8-9.
to do so. If you have breathing problems but • Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer
for service.
1-39
Passenger Sensing System The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. under certain conditions. The driver’s airbags are
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible not part of the passenger sensing system.
when you start the vehicle. The words ON and OFF or the The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
symbol for on and off, will be visible in the rearview mirror are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
during the system check. When the system check is belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible. See passenger’s airbags should be enabled (may inflate)
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-52. or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States the right front passenger seat unless the passenger
airbag status indicator shows off. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger seat unless
the airbags are off.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator − Canada
1-40
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact
{CAUTION: airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front • the system determines that an infant is present in a
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the rear-facing infant seat
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be • the system determines that a small child is present
very close to the inflating airbag. Be sure the in a forward-facing child restraint
airbag is off before using a rear-facing child • the system determines that a small child is present
restraint in the right front seat position. in a booster seat
Even though the passenger sensing system is • a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
designed to turn off the passenger’s airbags if the seat for a period of time
the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, • the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
that an airbag will not deploy under some child restraints
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system
restraints be transported in vehicles with a rear
seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child When the passenger’s airbags have been turned off by
restraint, whenever possible. the passenger sensing system, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-41
If a child restraint has been installed and the on If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint because that person is not sitting properly in the
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger person to place the seatback in the fully upright position,
Seat Position on page 1-28. then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child this position for about two minutes. This will allow the
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly system to detect that person and then enable the
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat passenger’s airbags.
cushion if possible.
If the on indicator is still lit, do not secure the child
restraint in this vehicle and check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s airbags anytime
the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
airbags, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
1-42
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
{CAUTION: You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-44 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
it means that something may be wrong with
system operates.
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
{CAUTION:
of the airbags. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-51 for more on this, including important Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
safety information. or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-43
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Adding Equipment to Your
Vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to sides of the vehicle that could keep the
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. airbags from working properly?
Your dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system.
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8-14. metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
{CAUTION: sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before
you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers
For up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is and addresses for Customer Assistance are in
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
airbag can still inflate during improper service. in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction
You can be injured if you are close to an Procedure on page 8-2.
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow wires,
wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-44
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my Restraint System Check
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
Checking the Restraint Systems
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
of the airbag system. If you have questions, anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers its job, have it repaired.
and addresses for Customer Assistance are
in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
Procedure on page 8-2. is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the passenger’s airbag, or the airbag covering on
the driver’s and passenger’s seatback, the airbag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
airbag module in the steering wheel, both the airbag
module and the instrument panel for the passenger’s
airbag, or both the airbag module and seatback for
the driver’s and passenger’s side impact airbag.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
1-45
Replacing Restraint System Parts If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
After a Crash or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and
repairs may be necessary even if the belt was not being
used at the time of the collision.
{CAUTION: If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
may not properly protect the person using it, replace the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt buckle
resulting in serious injury or even death in a assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckle
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash, After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
have them inspected and any necessary front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies,
replacements made as soon as possible. even if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts? belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been
in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-51.
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
1-46
Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2 Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-32
Keyless Access System ...................................2-4 Engine Exhaust ............................................2-33
Keyless Access System Operation ....................2-5 Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-33
Doors and Locks .............................................2-9 Mirrors ...........................................................2-34
Door Locks ....................................................2-9 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Power Door Locks ........................................2-11 OnStar® ...................................................2-34
Automatic Door Lock .....................................2-11 Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-35
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............2-12 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-35
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12 Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-36
Trunk ..........................................................2-12 Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-36
Windows ........................................................2-15 OnStar® System .............................................2-37
Power Windows ............................................2-16 Universal Home Remote System .......................2-39
Sun Visors ...................................................2-18 Universal Home Remote System Operation ......2-40
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-18 Storage Areas ................................................2-44
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-18 Glove Box ...................................................2-44
Valet Lockout Switch .....................................2-20 Cupholder(s) ................................................2-44
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-20 Center Console Storage Area .........................2-44
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-20 Map Pocket .................................................2-44
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-21 Floor Mats ...................................................2-45
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-22 Rear Storage Area ........................................2-45
Starting the Engine .......................................2-22 Convenience Net ..........................................2-46
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-24 Retractable Hardtop ........................................2-46
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-25 Lowering the Retractable Hardtop ...................2-47
Parking Brake ..............................................2-29 Raising the Retractable Hardtop ......................2-48
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-30 Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-56
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-32 Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel .......2-56
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children unattended in a vehicle is
dangerous, but it is even more dangerous if
the keyless access transmitter is also left in
the vehicle. A child or others could be badly
injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
If they started the engine and moved the shift
lever out of PARK (P), that would release the
parking brake.
Do not leave the keyless access transmitter in
a vehicle with children.
2-2
There is a key that works Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s) and/or
the glove box and can key, it could be difficult to get into your vehicle.
open the trunk if vehicle You may even have to damage your vehicle to get
power is lost. See Trunk in. Be sure you have a spare transmitter and/or key.
on page 2-12 for more
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
information.
See Roadside Service on page 8-6.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system,
OnStar® may be able to send a command to unlock
your vehicle if needed. If the vehicle battery is
dead, OnStar® will be unable to unlock the vehicle.
See OnStar® System on page 2-37 for more
information.
Your vehicle has a keyless access system with

pushbutton start. See Ignition Positions on page 2-21
for information on starting the vehicle.
2-3
Keyless Access System If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless access
transmitter range, try doing one of the following:
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that • Check the distance. You may be too far from your
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with rainy or snowy weather.
Industry Canada.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. try again.
2. This device must accept any interference received, • Check to determine if battery replacement is
including interference that may cause undesired necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
operation. Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. • Check to make sure that an electronic device such
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not
1. This device may not cause interference. causing interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, • If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
including interference that may cause undesired qualified technician for service.
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
Keyless Access System Operation Q (Lock): Press this button to lock the doors.
The indicator light on the door will flash once. If this
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that allows button is pressed twice, the doors will lock, the light will
you to lock and unlock your doors, unlock your trunk lid flash once and the horn will sound once.
and disarm or arm your theft-deterrent system. The range
distance is as much as 100 feet (30 m) away. K (Unlock): Press this button once to unlock the
driver’s door. The indicator light on the door will flash
Your vehicle comes twice. Press the button twice within 10 seconds to
with two transmitters, unlock both doors. If it is dark enough outside, your
and up to four can interior lamps will come on.
be matched to your
vehicle. See “Matching Your memory settings may also be recalled when you
Transmitter(s) to Your press the unlock button on the keyless access
Vehicle” later in transmitter. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
this section. Wheel on page 2-56 for more information.
G (Trunk): Press this button to open the trunk

while the engine is turned off or the shift lever is
in PARK (P).
2-5
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle 4. Open the trunk.
Each keyless access transmitter is coded to prevent 5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
another transmitter from working with your vehicle. If a 6. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be READY FOR FOB #X. X can be 2, 3 or 4.
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any 7. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in the
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons
dealer. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, facing to the right.
the lost transmitter will not work with your vehicle.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters 8. Once the transmitter is programmed, a beep will
matched to it. sound. The DIC will display READY FOR #X,
where X can be 3 or 4, or MAX # FOBS LEARNED.
To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when you
have a recognized transmitter, do the following: 9. Press the ACC button.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Have the recognized and new, unrecognized
transmitters on your person.
3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehicle
key into the key cylinder located on the lower rear
fascia on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See Trunk
on page 2-12 for more information on the key
cylinder.
2-6
The Canadian immobilizer standard requires Canadian 9. The DIC will display OFF-ACC TO LEARN again.
owners to see their GM dealer for matching new 10. Press the ACC button.
transmitters when a recognized transmitter is not
available. United States owners are permitted to match 11. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
a new transmitter to their vehicle when a recognized count down to zero, one minute at a time.
transmitter is not available. The procedure will require 12. The DIC will display OFF-ACC TO LEARN again.
three ten minute cycles to complete the matching
process. Do the following: 13. Press the ACC button.
1. The vehicle must be off. 14. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons 15. A beep will sound and the DIC will read READY
facing to the right. FOR FOB #1. At this time, all previously known
transmitters have been erased.
3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehicle
key into the key cylinder located on the lower rear 16. Once the transmitter is recognized and
fascia on the driver’s side of the vehicle. programmed, a beep will sound and the DIC will
See Trunk on page 2-12 for more information on display READY FOR FOB #2.
the key cylinder. If you have additional transmitters to program, take
4. Open the trunk. transmitter 1 out of the transmitter pocket and place
transmitter 2 in the pocket. This can be done repeatedly
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds. until up to four transmitters have been programmed.
6. The DIC message will display OFF-ACC TO LEARN. The DIC will then display MAX # FOBS LEARNED and
will exit the programming mode.
7. Press the ACC button.
When you are done programming transmitters, press
8. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
the ACC button.
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
2-7
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your keyless access
transmitter should last about three years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display
NO FOBS DETECTED when you try to start the vehicle.
If this happens, place the transmitter in the glove box
transmitter pocket with the buttons facing to the
right. Then, with the vehicle in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), press the brake pedal and the
START button. Although this will start the vehicle,
it is recommended that you replace the transmitter 1. Insert a coin or similar object into the slot on the
battery as soon as possible. The DIC may display back of the transmitter and gently pry apart the
FOB BATTERY LOW. front and back.
2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body 3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)
transferred to these surfaces may damage the side up. Use a battery, type CR2032, or equivalent.
transmitter. 4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put
it together so water will not get in.
5. Test the transmitter.
2-8
Doors and Locks To lock or unlock your vehicle from the outside, use the
keyless access transmitter and press the appropriate
lock or unlock button. You may also unlock and open the
Door Locks door passively when you squeeze the door handle
sensor, as long as you have your transmitter with you.
Passive entry occurs when the door handle sensor
{CAUTION: is pressed and the vehicle recognizes your keyless
access transmitter. When the passenger door is opened
Unlocked doors can be dangerous. first, the driver’s door will also become unlocked.
• Passengers — especially children — can From the inside, use the power door lock buttons located
easily open the doors and fall out of a at the top of the door panel near the window. See Power
moving vehicle. When a door is locked it Door Locks on page 2-11 for more information.
will not open. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors whenever
you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
To open a door from the inside, press the button in front
of the door handle and push the door open.
2-9
If power to the vehicle or the keyless access transmitter
is lost, there are two ways to open the door.
If you are outside the vehicle, there is a door release

tab in the trunk. The tab is located behind a panel on
the driver’s side of the trunk. Pull the handle to
If you are inside the vehicle, use the door release
unlock and unlatch the driver’s door. See Trunk on
handle located on the floor next to each seat. Pull the
page 2-12 for information on opening the trunk during
handle up to unlock and unlatch the door.
a loss of power.
2-10
Power Door Locks When the lock portion of the button is pressed and the
door is closed, a beep will sound and the light will
The power door lock come on for a few seconds, then turn off. If the button is
switches are located on pressed and the door is open, a beep will sound and
the door panels near the light will stay on continuously.
the windows. When the unlock portion of the button is pressed and
the door is closed, a beep will sound and the light
will flash twice. When the button is pressed and the door
is open, a beep will sound and the light will flash.
Automatic Door Lock

Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved
out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock.
K (Unlock): Press this portion of the button to unlock
the doors. If someone needs to get out while the vehicle is not in
PARK (P), have the person use the power door unlock
Q (Lock): Press this portion of the button to lock switch. When the door is closed again, the doors will lock
the doors. either when your foot is removed from the brake or the
vehicle speed becomes faster than 8 mph (13 km/h).
There is an indicator light on the rear of the door near
the window.
2-11
Programmable Automatic Trunk
Door Unlock
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the shift {CAUTION:
lever is moved into PARK (P), both doors will unlock.
With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the engine running, It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
door unlocking can be programmed through prompts open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
These prompts allow the driver to choose various smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
unlock settings. For programming information, even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-78. open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
Lockout Protection between the body and the trunk lid:
Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn • Make sure all other windows are shut.
three times and unlock the driver’s door when both • Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
doors are closed and there is a keyless access system to its highest speed and select the
transmitter inside the vehicle. When the driver’s door control setting that will force outside air
is opened, the key in reminder chime will sound into your vehicle. See Climate Control
continuously. The vehicle will remain locked only when System.
at least one transmitter has been removed from the • If you have air outlets on or under the
vehicle and both doors are closed. See DIC Vehicle instrument panel, open them all the way.
Personalization on page 3-78. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
2-12
Trunk Lock Release To disable this feature, see “Valet Lockout Switch”
under Theft-Deterrent Systems on page 2-18.
You may passively enter the trunk when you squeeze
{CAUTION: the trunk release sensor located on the rear of the trunk
lid under the emblem, as long as you have your
Moving parts of the powered trunk lid can be transmitter with you. The vehicle must be in PARK (P)
dangerous. You or others could be injured. and the valet lockout switch must be off. See Valet
Lockout Switch on page 2-20.
Keep yourself and others away from the trunk
lid and its mechanism while it is closing. To close the trunk,
press the button on the
underside of the trunk lid.
The trunk lock release
button is located to the left
of the steering wheel on
the instrument panel.
To stop the trunk lid while it is closing, do one of the

following:
Press the button to open the trunk. To use this feature,

• Press the trunk lock release button located on the
instrument panel.
your vehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
and the valet lockout switch must be off. • Use the vehicle key on the rear fascia.
You can also press the button with the trunk symbol • Squeeze the trunk release sensor located on the
on the keyless access transmitter to open the trunk. rear of the trunk lid.
2-13
• Press the button with the trunk symbol on the Emergency Trunk Release Handle
keyless access transmitter.
• Press the trunk close button on the underside of
the trunk lid.
To begin opening the trunk from the stopped position,
use any of the methods above, except pressing the trunk
close button.
To resume closing the power trunk lid, press the trunk
close button on the underside of the trunk lid.
If the vehicle has lost

battery power, you can
still open the trunk
using the key.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release

handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk near the latch.
The key cylinder is located behind a cover on the lower This handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the
rear fascia on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Use the release handle and push up on the trunk lid to release
key to pry open the door to access the key cylinder. the latch from the inside.
2-14
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-15
Power Windows Power Window Initialize
After a power reconnect such as battery replacement,
The power window
the express-up and index-up features will not function
switches are located on
until the system is initialized. Once power is restored,
each door near the
do the following:
armrest.
1. Close the door.
2. Raise the window by holding the up arrow on the
power window switch.
3. Hold the up arrow for three seconds after the
window is closed. Release the switch. Then hold the
up arrow again for three seconds.
The express-up system must be initialized to operate
Press the up or down arrows on the switches to raise or the windows with the door open.
lower the windows.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
that allows you to use the power windows once
the ignition has been turned off. For more information,
see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22.
2-16
Express-Down Window
This feature is on both power windows. Press the down {CAUTION:
arrow on the switch to the second position to activate
the express-down feature. If you want to stop the If express override is activated, the window
window as it is lowering, press the switch again.
will not reverse automatically. You or others
Express-Up Window could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
This feature is on both power windows. Press the up make sure that all people and obstructions are
arrow on the switch to the second position to activate the
clear of the window path.
express-up feature. If you want to stop the window as
it is raising, press the switch again.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature Express Window Anti-Pinch Override

If any object is in the path of the window when In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position. switch all the way down in the express position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also The window will rise for as long as the switch is held.
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window Once the switch is released, the express mode is
will return to normal operation once the obstruction or re-activated.
condition is removed.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
2-17
Window Indexing Theft-Deterrent Systems
This feature automatically lowers the window a small Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
amount when the door is opened. Then, when the door Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
is closed, the window will raise to its full up position. features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Sun Visors
Notice: Raising or lowering the retractable hardtop Theft-Deterrent System
with the visor or the visor vanity mirror cover up, Your vehicle is equipped with a theft-deterrent alarm
may cause damage to the visor or mirror cover. system.
Always return the visor to the center mount or lower
the cover on the visor vanity mirror before raising With this system, the
or lowering the retractable hardtop. security light will flash
Swing down the visor to block out glare. It can also be when the door is open and
detached from the center mount and moved to the side. locked with the power
door lock switch.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
Swing the visor down and lift the cover. The lamp will
automatically come on when the cover is opened.
If this light is on continuously while the engine is
running, your vehicle needs service.
2-18
Arming the System Testing the Alarm
Use one of the three following items listed here to Do the following to test the system:
arm the system: 1. Make sure the trunk lid is latched.
• Press the lock button on the keyless access
2. Lower the window on the driver’s door.
transmitter.
• Open the door. Lock the door with the power door 3. Manually arm the system.
lock switch. The security light should flash. Remove 4. Close the doors and wait 30 seconds.
the keyless access transmitter from the interior of the 5. Reach through the open window and manually pull
vehicle and close the door. The security light will stop the release lever on the floor.
flashing and stay on. After 30 seconds, the light
should turn off. 6. Turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button on
• The vehicle can be programmed to automatically the transmitter.
lock the doors and arm the system when you exit the If the alarm is inoperative, check to see if the horn
vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on works. If not, check the horn fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
page 3-78. Breakers on page 6-80. If the horn works, but the alarm
Now, if a door or the trunk lid is opened without the doesn’t go off, see your dealer.
keyless access transmitter, the alarm will go off.
Your horn will sound for two minutes, then it will go off
Disarming the System
to save battery power. And, your vehicle will not start Always use your keyless access transmitter to unlock a
without a keyless transmitter present. door either by pressing the unlock button on the
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the transmitter or by squeezing the door handle sensor
driver’s door with the power door lock switch after while you have the transmitter with you. Unlocking a
the doors are closed. door any other way will set off the alarm. If your alarm
sounds, press the unlock button on the keyless
If your passenger stays in the vehicle when you leave access transmitter to disarm it.
with the keyless access transmitter, have the passenger
lock the vehicle after the doors are closed. This way the
alarm will not arm, and your passenger will not set it off.
2-19
Valet Lockout Switch Starting and Operating Your
The valet lockout switch Vehicle
is located inside the
glove box. New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
Press the switch to ON to disable the use of the trunk
and convertible top. The trunk cannot be opened except • Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
by using the key if the valet lockout is on. (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with
Press the switch to OFF to enable the use of the trunk new linings can mean premature wear and
and convertible top. earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
Locking the glove box with your key will also help to guideline every time you get new brake linings.
secure your vehicle. Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-20
Ignition Positions if all doors are closed. The ignition mode will change to
OFF, if a front door is opened. See Retained Accessory
Your vehicle has an Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more information.
electronic keyless ignition If the shifter is not in PARK (P), the ignition mode will
with pushbutton start. change to ACC (Accessory). See Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-30.
When the engine is off, press this button to place the
vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY MODE ON
will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). This
mode allows you to use things like the radio and the
windshield wipers while the engine is off. Use accessory
mode if you must have your vehicle in motion while
the engine is off, for example, if your vehicle is being
towed. If the door is open while in accessory mode,
the key in reminder chime will sound continuously.
/ (START): Press this button while your foot is on the If the push-button start is not working, your vehicle
brake to start the engine. The shifter must be in may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to start the engine and the interference to the keyless access system. See
keyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle for DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for more
the ignition to work. information.
After being in ACC for about 20 minutes, the vehicle will
9 ACC (OFF/ACCESSORY): When this button is automatically enter RAP or will turn off, depending on
pressed, the engine will turn off even if the shifter is not if the doors are opened or closed.
in PARK (P). If the shifter is in PARK (P), the ignition
mode will change to Retained Accessory Power (RAP),
2-21
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Starting the Engine
The following accessories on your vehicle may be used Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off: Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
• Radio a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
• Power Windows The keyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls for the ignition to work.
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
if a door is opened. If you want power for another vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
10 minutes, close all the doors and press the ACC transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
button to place the vehicle in accessory mode. vehicle is stopped.
Press the button again and the vehicle will return
1. With your foot on the brake pedal, press the
to RAP.
START button located on the instrument panel.
If there is not a keyless access transmitter present,
the DIC will display NO FOB DETECTED. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for more
information. When the engine begins cranking, let
go of the button. The idle speed will go down
as your engine gets warm.
If the battery in the keyless access transmitter is
weak, the DIC will display FOB BATTERY
LOW. You can still drive the vehicle. See “Battery
Replacement” under Keyless Access System
Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
2-22
Notice: Holding the button in for longer than Stopping Your Engine
15 seconds at a time will cause the vehicle’s battery
to be drained much sooner. This can also cause Move the shift lever to PARK (P) and press the ACC
damage to the starter motor. Wait 15 seconds button located on the instrument panel. If the shifter is
between each try to avoid draining your vehicle’s not in PARK (P), the vehicle will go into the accessory
battery or damaging the starter. mode, the engine will turn off and the DIC will display
SHIFT TO PARK. When the shifter is moved to
2. If the engine does not start and no DIC message is PARK (P), the vehicle will go into the RAP mode, if all
displayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again. doors are closed. The ignition mode will change to OFF,
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the if a front door is opened. See Retained Accessory
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more information.
parts or accessories, you could change the way the If the keyless access transmitter is not detected while
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, going to off, the DIC will display NO FOB – OFF
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine OR RUN?.
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
more information.
2-23
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant {CAUTION:
heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a and cause a fire. You could be seriously
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (-18°C) as
noted on the cord. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
1. Turn off the engine.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of the engine compartment, in front of the engine of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
coolant surge tank. your dealer in the area where you will be parking
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
2-24
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-30.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
the best position to use when you start your engine starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
because your vehicle cannot move easily. transmission shift lock control system.
2-25
You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the vehicle is running.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure {CAUTION:
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
Then move the shift lever into the gear desired. running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-32. your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle shift into a drive gear while your engine is
is moving forward could damage the transmission. running at high speed.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped. Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, with the engine running at high speed may damage
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission, the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
on page 5-32. at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are normal driving.
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Maximum engine speed is limited to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
2-26
Driver Shift Control (DSC) To request an upshift in DSC, briefly move the shift lever
up toward the plus symbol. To request a downshift, briefly
The Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature lets you manually move the shift lever down toward the minus symbol.
control over the operation of the transmission. The Head-Up Display (HUD) will display the change in
gear, though the actual upshift or downshift may be
To use this feature, delayed until the engine speed is correct for that gear.
move the shift lever
from the AUTOMATIC The gear displays on the HUD until the next time you
OVERDRIVE (D) position upshift or downshift.
to the left and into the The gear selected and shown in the HUD is one of a
driver shift control gate. number of gears available. It does not mean that
the vehicle will operate only in that specific gear.
The actual gear the vehicle shifts to depends on a
combination of the driver-requested gear range,
vehicle speed and throttle position.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift
Control (DSC), you could damage your vehicle.
A plus symbol will also appear on the shift console Always upshift when necessary while using DSC.
above the AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) indicator and If you do not upshift as the engine approaches the
minus symbol will appear below the indicator. red line on the engine rpm gage, the engine speed is
controlled to limit the engine rpm.
2-27
Not all manual downshift requests will be accepted by In higher gears, an automatic downshift will occur if you
the transmission. To prevent excessive engine rpms, press the accelerator pedal to the floor. This feature
each gear has a maximum vehicle speed associated provides adequate acceleration capabilities if you forget
with it. Any downshift request above this speed will not to downshift manually.
be allowed by the transmission. Automatic upshifts and downshifts will not display in
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the current gear the HUD.
will flash multiple times in the DIC, indicating that DSC can be used while using cruise control, but
the transmission has not shifted gears. transmission shifting will be different while the cruise
Some automatic downshifts may occur to maintain control is on. This is not a malfunction and is necessary
minimum engine speed. This only happens the vehicle to allow proper operation of the cruise control.
is left in too high of a gear for the vehicle’s speed. To return to fully automatic operation, move the shift
For example, if you have been driving in fifth gear range lever to the right and back into the AUTOMATIC
and come to a stop without manually downshifting, OVERDRIVE (D).
fifth gear will continue to display in the HUD. The
transmission will automatically downshift to second When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy
gear. As you begin to drive and accelerate, the and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second
transmission will automatically upshift as quickly as gear. A higher gear allows you to gain more traction on
possible to the selected fifth gear. slippery surfaces.
2-28
Parking Brake When you move out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
and the engine is running, the parking brake should
The parking brake pedal is release. If the parking brake has not been fully released
located to the left of the and you try to drive off with the parking brake on, the
regular brake pedal, parking brake indicator light will come on and stay on.
near the driver’s door. If the parking brake does not fully release, you can
manually release the pedal.
{CAUTION:
Always shift to PARK (P) before pulling the
manual release lever. If your hand or arm is
in the way of the pedal you could be hurt.
The pedal springs back quickly. Keep your
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal hand and arm away when you use the manual
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
release lever.
pedal down with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the parking brake indicator light
on the instrument panel cluster should come on. Before releasing the manual parking brake, be sure to
If it does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced. put the vehicle in PARK (P) and turn the ignition off.
2-29
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
Reach under the driver’s side of the instrument panel
and pull down on the manual release lever, which 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the
is located behind the parking brake pedal. Pull down on lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
the yellow tab. If the parking brake does not release, 3. Turn the ignition off.
you should have your vehicle towed to your dealer
for service.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
2-30
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Torque Lock
Engine Running If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
{CAUTION: in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
the engine running. Your vehicle could move driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)” listed previously in this section.
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
your vehicle with the engine running.
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold down
the regular brake pedal. See if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-31
Shifting Out of Park (P) Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the vehicle is running. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-25.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever – push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as
you maintain brake application. Then press the shift
lever button and move the shift lever into the gear
you wish.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Press the ACC button twice to place the ignition in
accessory mode.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
{CAUTION:
5. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer as soon Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
as possible.
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
2-32
Engine Exhaust Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas {CAUTION:
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
Idling the engine with the climate control
You might have exhaust coming in if: system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
different. Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
over high points on the road or over road One place this can happen is a garage.
debris. Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
• Repairs were not done correctly. NEVER park in a garage with the engine
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been running.
modified improperly.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into See Winter Driving on page 5-27.
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-33
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
with OnStar®
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can Your vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearview
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine mirror. The mirror also contains OnStar® controls.
is running unless you have to. If you have left For more information about OnStar®, see OnStar®
the engine running, the vehicle can move System on page 2-37.
suddenly. You or others could be injured. O (On/Off): This button, located on the lower left side
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even of the mirror, is for the automatic dimming functions.
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever Mirror Operation
to PARK (P). The automatic dimming feature is active each time the
vehicle is started.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30. and release the on/off button. The indicator light will
illuminate when this feature is active.
Cleaning the Mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2-34
Outside Power Heated Mirrors Both mirrors have a heated feature to rid them of snow,
ice, or condensation. They will heat when the rear
The controls for the window defogger is turned on. See “Rear Window
outside power mirrors are Defogger” under Dual Climate Control System on
located is on the driver’s page 3-41. If the vehicle has the memory option, the
door armrest. preferred mirror position can be stored. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-56.
Both mirrors can be manually folded inward by pulling
them toward the vehicle. This feature may be useful
when going through a car wash or a confined space.
Push the mirrors away from the vehicle, to the normal
position, before driving.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror

Move the selector switch, located below the four-way
control pad, to the left or the right to choose the driver’s The driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare of
side or passenger’s side mirror. Use the arrows headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the
located on the four-way control pad to adjust the position on and off settings on the inside automatic dimming
of the mirror. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little rearview mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview
of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen while Mirror with OnStar® on page 2-34.
sitting in a comfortable driving position. Keep the
selector switch in the center position when not adjusting
either outside mirror.
2-35
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror Outside Convex Mirror
The passenger’s side mirror is also capable of
performing the curb view assist feature. This feature
will cause the mirror to tilt to a factory programmed {CAUTION:
position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R).
This feature may be useful in allowing you to view the A convex mirror can make things (like other
curb when you are parallel parking. vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted, If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
the mirror switch may be used. The mirror will then could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
return to this new position when the vehicle is shifted inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
into REVERSE (R). before changing lanes.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and
a five-second delay has occurred, the passenger’s side
mirror will return to its original position. The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver driver’s seat. It also makes things look farther away
Information Center (DIC). See “Park Assist” under than they really are.
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-78 for more
information.
2-36
OnStar® System Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
OnStar® Services
The OnStar® Directions and Connections Plan is
included on new vehicles for the first year from the date
of purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
first year to meet your needs. For more information,
press the OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live advisors Directions and Connections Plan
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security, • Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
information, and convenience services. If your airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call • Emergency Services
to OnStar® Emergency where we can request emergency • Roadside Assistance
services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in
the car, call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can • Stolen Vehicle Tracking
send a signal to unlock your doors. if you need roadside • AccidentAssist
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they will get
you the help you need. • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and • Remote Diagnostics
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service • Online Concierge
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or • Driving Directions
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR • RideAssist
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. • Information and Convenience Services
2-37
OnStar® Personal Calling OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling Your vehicle may be
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a equipped with a Talk/Mute
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle. button that can be used
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice to interact with OnStar®.
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
See Audio Steering Wheel
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Controls on page 3-84
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in for more information.
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor by
pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR When calling into voice mail systems or to dial directory
(1-888-466-7827). numbers, press the control, wait for the “number
please” response, say the number(s) to be dialed, wait
OnStar® Virtual Advisor for the number(s) to be repeated and then say “dial.”
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of See the OnStar® User’s Guide for more information.
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses your minutes to
access weather, local traffic reports and sports updates.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for
more information.
2-38
Universal Home Remote System If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Home
Remote Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
The control buttons, for the Universal Home Remote Changes and modifications to this system by other than
System, are located on the driver’s sun visor. an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
The Universal Home Remote System, a combined
universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to
replace up to three hand−held transmitters used to
activate devices such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, and
home lighting.
2-39
Universal Home Remote System Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
Operation programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
garage door opener that does not have the “stop and See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
reverse” feature. This includes any garage door opener in this section or, for assistance, see Customer
model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you Assistance Offices on page 8-4.
have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes,
please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
the programming of your Universal Home Remote door or gate operator you are programming. When
Transmitter. programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
person available to assist you in the programming steps. accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
2-40
Programming Universal Home Remote 4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully
Follow these steps to program up to three channels: receives the frequency signal from the hand-held
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal transmitter. Release both buttons.
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the 5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Universal Home Remote indicator light begins Remote button and observe the indicator light.
to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the If the indicator light stays on constantly,
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not programming is complete and your device should
repeat this step to program a second and/or third activate when the Universal Home Remote button is
hand-held transmitter to the remaining two Universal pressed and released.
Home Remote buttons.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the “Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
indicator light in view. programmed channels.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held and then turns to a constant light, continue with
transmitter button. Do not release the buttons Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
until Step 4 has been completed. programming of a rolling-code equipped device,
Some entry gates and garage door openers may most commonly, a garage door opener.
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure 6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
Programming” later in this section. or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
2-41
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” Gate Operator and Canadian
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer. Programming
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8. Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
programmed Universal Home Remote button for
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
two seconds, then release. Repeat the
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
press/hold/release sequence a second time, and
to time out in the same manner.
depending on the brand of the garage door opener,
or other rolling code device, repeat this sequence If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
a third time to complete the programming. programming a gate operator or garage door opener by
The Universal Home Remote should now activate using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
your rolling-code equipped device. procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote the following:
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming Universal
Home Remote.” You do not want to repeat Step 1, Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
as this will erase all previous programming from button while you press and release every two seconds
the Universal Home Remote buttons. (cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
2-42
Using Universal Home Remote Reprogramming a Single Universal
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote Home Remote Button
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light To program a device to Universal Home Remote using
will come on while the signal is being transmitted. a Universal Home Remote button previously trained,
Erasing Universal Home Remote follow these steps:
Buttons 1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home

Remote button. Do not release the button.
To erase programming from the three Universal Home 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
Remote buttons do the following: 20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. “Programming Universal Home Remote” shown
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer earlier in this section.
than 30 seconds. For additional information on Universal Home Remote,
2. Release both buttons. see Customer Assistance Offices on page 8-4.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the train
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any time
beginning with Step 2 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” shown earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button” following this section.
2-43
Storage Areas Center Console Storage Area
There is a center console storage area located between
Glove Box the seats. To open this storage area, push the latch
button and lift the lid.
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. The glove
There is also an upright center console storage area
box has a light inside. Use the key to lock and unlock.
between the seatbacks. To open the storage area, press
and release the button near the top so it extends out.
Cupholder(s) Then, turn the button in either direction to unlatch the lid
and pull the console lid down. After you close the lid,
The cupholders are located under a lid in the front press the release button back in.
console to the right of the shift lever. Press the left side
of the lid and it will open automatically.
Map Pocket
The map/storage pockets are located on each door
behind a cover.
2-44
Floor Mats Rear Storage Area
The driver’s side floor mat is held in place by two snaps
and the passenger’s side is held in place by one.
Remove and Replace the Floor Mats
To remove the floor mats,
pull up on the rear of the
mat to disconnect from
the snaps.
There is a cargo divider located in the trunk to keep

cargo from getting in the way of the retractable hardtop.
The cargo divider must be in place for the top to move.
To reinstall the floor mats, line up the openings in the To install the cargo divider, snap the bottom of the
floor mat over the snaps and push down into place. divider onto the snaps (B) located on the floor of the
Be sure that the driver’s side floor mat is properly placed trunk. Then, swing the divider up and place the pins on
on the floor so that it does not block the movement of each side of the divider into the notches (A) on either
the accelerator pedal. side of the trunk.
2-45
There is also a storage compartment located in the
trunk on the passenger’s side.
Retractable Hardtop
To access the storage compartment, unsnap the lid. The following procedures explain the proper operation
To reinstall the lid, line up the opening in the lid over of the retractable hardtop. The retractable hardtop
the snap and push down into place. will not operate if the valet lockout switch is on.
If the retractable hardtop is lowered or raised multiple
Convenience Net times, the engine should be running while doing so
to prevent drain on the vehicle’s battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a convenience net.
The convenience net attaches to the floor of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. {CAUTION:
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in
the trunk as far forward as you can. When not using the Moving parts of the retractable hardtop can be
net, hook the net to the tabs securing it to the sill plate. dangerous. People can be injured by the
hardtop and its mechanism. Keep people away
from your vehicle when you are lowering or
raising the top.
2-46
Lowering the Retractable Hardtop 5. Push and hold the bottom
of the retractable hardtop
Notice: Leaving the retractable hardtop down and button located on the
exposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoor console behind the shifter
conditions may cause damage. Always close the lever. The windows will
retractable hardtop if leaving your vehicle outdoors. automatically lower and
the top will automatically
1. Park on a level surface and shift the transmission lower into the storage
into PARK (P). area. A chime will sound
2. The vehicle’s engine must be on or in ACC. when the top has lowered
3. Lower both sun visors. completely.
Notice: Raising or lowering the top while the vehicle

is in motion can cause damage to the top or top
mechanism. Make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P) If the radio is on, the sound may be muted briefly while
to lower or raise the top. the retractable top is lowered. This occurs because
a new audio system equalization is being loaded.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the inside Under certain conditions, the Driver Information Center
of your vehicle. Dry off the top before lowering it. (DIC) may display a message regarding the retractable
hardtop. If this happens, see DIC Warnings and
4. Make sure that nothing or no one is on or around Messages on page 3-67 for more information.
the top. Make sure the trunk cargo cover is in
place with nothing on top or in front of the cargo
cover. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-45
for more information. Also, make sure the valet
lockout switch is off.
2-47
Raising the Retractable Hardtop 5. Push and hold the
top of the retractable
1. Park on a level surface. Shift the transmission into hardtop button located
PARK (P). behind the shift lever.
2. The vehicle’s engine must be on or in ACC. The windows will
automatically lower
3. Lower both sun visors. and the top will raise.
Notice: Raising or lowering the top while the vehicle A chime will sound
is in motion can cause damage to the top or top when the top has
mechanism. Make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P) to raised completely.
lower or raise the top.
4. Make sure nothing or no one is on or around the
top. Make sure the trunk cargo cover is in place
with no cargo on top of or in front of the cargo After the top is fully raised, release the retractable
cover. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-45 for hardtop button. If you press the button again within
more information. Also, be sure the valet lockout five seconds, the windows will automatically close.
switch is off.
If your radio is on, you may notice a brief mute in sound.
This is normal and due to a new audio system
equalization being loaded for the vehicle with the top
raised.
Under certain conditions, the Driver Information Center
(DIC) may display a message regarding the retractable
hardtop. If this happens, see DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-67 for more information.
2-48
Manually Raising the Retractable Hardtop Notice: Pressing the retractable hardtop button
when the hydraulic pump valve is open could
If your vehicle has a power loss, such as a dead damage the pump. Always close the hydraulic pump
battery, you can still raise the top manually by doing valve after the retractable hardtop has been closed
the following: manually.
1. Lower both sun visors and open both doors.
2. Use the key to open the trunk. See Keys on
page 2-2 and Trunk on page 2-12 for more
information.
3. Raise the trunk by hand.
4. Remove the wrench located inside the passenger’s
side storage compartment.
5. Find the hydraulic pump
under the carpet on
the rear driver’s side
of the trunk. Open the
valve by turning it
counterclockwise with
your hand until it stops.
6. Pull both sides of the rear tonneau over-center link
down to unlock the linkage.
2-49
7. Move the rear tonneau rearward and up to the 8. Push both sides of the rear tonneau over-center link
stored position. Pull from the center of the tonneau up until they stop to lock the linkage.
to keep pressure even. The rubber bumper on 9. Close the hydraulic pump valve by turning it
each corner will fit against the underside of the clockwise with your hand until it stops.
trunk decklid.
2-50
10. Remove the upright center storage compartment. 11. Reach behind the square hole and push the front
Use the wrench to remove the four screws holding tonneau over-center link up. The front tonneau
the storage area in place. should pull up easily. If it does not, push the
over-center link up more.
2-51
13. Reach in from the side of the vehicle and under the
top to remove the headliner plug. The plug will be
located in the center of the top near the front.
12. Manually move the front tonneau to the open 14. Insert the wrench into the bolt beneath the plug
position. Once the front tonneau is open, fold location. Turn the wrench about one-quarter turn
the side wings in by gently pressing them in. Do not counterclockwise until it stops while gently pulling up
force the wings. If they are hard to move, make on the center of the top to release it.
sure the front tonneau is open all the way.
2-52
15. Hold the top in the front and side and lift the top out 16. Hold the top in the front and the rear and lift the top
of the stored position. until it is almost closed. Be careful not to pinch your
fingers between the rear of the top and the rear
window.
2-53
17. Place your hands on the top and guide the top into 18. While sitting in the driver’s seat, pull down on the
the closed position. rear of the top.
2-54
19. While holding the rear
of the top down, insert
the wrench into the
bolt in the plug opening
in the headliner.
Turn the wrench
counterclockwise until it
stops to fully open
the latch jaws around
the pins.
20. Pull down on the roof with the latch rotated open.
Turn the wrench clockwise until it stops to lock the
top into position. Push up on the roof. If it moves
away from the windshield header it is not latched 21. From outside the vehicle, push down on both rear
and you will need to repeat the previous steps. corners of the top to make sure it is completely
locked into place.
22. From inside the vehicle, reach behind the headrest
and gently pull the wings out a small amount.
Then, fold the front tonneau to the closed position.
23. Manually close the trunk.
2-55
Vehicle Personalization Use the following steps to program each button:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatback
In addition to the following features, your vehicle may recliner, lumbar and head restraint, both outside
also have features that can be programmed through the mirrors and the steering wheel to a comfortable
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle position.
Personalization on page 3-78 for more information.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps are heard,
Memory Seat, Mirrors and then release the button.
Steering Wheel A second mirror, seating and steering wheel position

can be programmed by repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2 (for driver 2). Each time a memory
button is pressed and released, a single beep will sound.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), the memory positions will be
recalled after a brief delay. If the vehicle is not in
PARK (P), three beeps will be heard and the memory
position will not be recalled.
Your vehicle is equipped with the memory package.

The controls for these features are located on the
driver’s seat, and are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver’s seating positions.
2-56
When the engine is started, the seat, mirrors, and When you use the keyless access transmitter to unlock
steering wheel may automatically adjust to their your vehicle, automatic seat and steering wheel
programmed positions. movement to the exit position may occur. The numbers
on the back of the transmitter, 1 and 2, corresponds
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
to the numbers on the memory buttons.
time, press one of the power seat controls, power
mirror control buttons, memory buttons, or power Further programming for automatic seat and mirror
steering column control. movement can be done using the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
Two personalized exit positions can be set by first
recalling the driving position (by pressing 1 or 2), then For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
positioning the steering wheel and seat in the desired Personalization on page 3-78.
exit positions and then pressing and holding the
exit button until two beeps are heard. The exit button is
located between buttons 1 and 2. With the vehicle in
PARK (P), the exit position for the previously set driver
can be recalled by pressing the exit button.
2-57
✍ NOTES
2-58
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-33
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-33
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6 Reading Lamps ............................................3-33
Horn .............................................................3-6 Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-34
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-34
Steering Column .........................................3-6 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3-38
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7 Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-40
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7 Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-41
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8 Climate Controls ............................................3-41
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8 Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-41
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9 Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-47
Rainsense™ Wipers ......................................3-10 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-47
Windshield Washer .......................................3-11
Headlamp Washer ........................................3-11 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-48
Cruise Control ..............................................3-12 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-49
Adaptive Cruise Control .................................3-15 Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-50
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-28 Trip Odometer ..............................................3-50
Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-29 Tachometer .................................................3-50
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-29 Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-50
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-30 Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-51
Adaptive Forward Lighting System ...................3-31 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-52
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-31 Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-54
Twilight Sentinel® ..........................................3-32 Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-54
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-33 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-55
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-33 Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ......3-56
3-1
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-57 Trip Computer ................................................3-82
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-57 Oil Life Indicator ...........................................3-82
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-58 Audio System(s) .............................................3-82
Engine Oil Pressure Gage .............................3-61 Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-84
Security Light ...............................................3-62 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-84
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-62 Radio Reception ...........................................3-85
Lights On Reminder ......................................3-62 Care of Your CDs .........................................3-86
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-62 Care of the CD Player ...................................3-86
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-63 Diversity Antenna System ..............................3-86
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-64 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System
DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-64 (Trunk Mounted) ........................................3-86
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-67 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System
Other Messages ...........................................3-77 (Diversity System) .....................................3-86
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-78
3-2
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Head-Up Display (HUD) Controls/Instrument Panel J. Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Button.
Brightness Controls. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on See Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering
page 3-34 or Instrument Panel Brightness on Column on page 3-6.
page 3-33. K. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn L. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. Wheel Controls on page 3-84.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel M. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-21.
Cluster on page 3-49.
N. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See “Windshield on page 2-25.
Wipers” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-7. O. Traction Control Button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 5-9.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls/Interior
Lamps. See DIC Controls and Displays on P. Retractable Hardtop Button. See Retractable
page 3-64. Hardtop on page 2-46.
F. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-47. Q. Cupholders. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-44.
G. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard R. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Warning Flashers on page 3-6. Lighter on page 3-41.
H. Voice Commands/Audio Controls. See OnStar® S. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate Control System
System on page 2-37 or Audio Steering Wheel on page 3-41.
Controls on page 3-84. T. Audio/Navigation System. See Navigation System
I. Adaptive Cruise Controls. See “Adaptive Cruise Overview on page 4-2.
Control (ACC)” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever U. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-44.
on page 3-7.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
also let police know you have a problem. Your front wheel pad to sound the horn.
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
The hazard warning Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
flasher button is located Steering Column
near the center of the
instrument panel. The power tilt wheel
control is located on the
outboard side of the
steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what

mode the ignition is in, even if the ignition is turned off.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work. To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up
and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push the control down
Other Warning Devices and the steering wheel will go down.
Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control rearward
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
and the steering wheel moves toward the rear of the
your vehicle.
vehicle. To set the memory position, see DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-78 and Memory Seat, Mirrors
and Steering Wheel on page 2-56.
3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the multifunction lever all the
way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column

includes the following:
• GTurn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7. To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
• 3Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8. when you release it.
• -Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-31. If you signal a turn or a lane change and the arrows
• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on flash faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out. Other drivers will not see the turn signal.
page 3-8.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
• ICruise Control. See Cruise Control on page 3-12. accidents. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
• P Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on signal a turn, check the fuses and check for burned-out
page 3-28. bulbs. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6-80.
3-7
Turn Signal on Chime Flash-to-Pass
A chime will remind you if you leave the turn signal on This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km) of driving. signal the driver in front of you that you want to
If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than pass. Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to
3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it use. When you do, the following will occur:
back on. • If the low-beam headlamps are on, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer as you hold the lever there. Release the lever
To change the headlamps from low beam to high, to turn them off.
push the turn signal lever all the way forward. • If the headlamps are on high-beam, they will switch
to low-beam. To return to high beam, push the
When the high beams are lever away from you.
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on. To change
the headlamps from
high to low, pull the lever
rearward.
3-8
Windshield Wipers &(Delay): Move the lever to this position to activate
the Rainsense™ function. Adjustments in this region
change the sensitivity of the Rainsense™ system.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the

windshield wipers.
8(Mist): Move the lever all the way down to mist and
release for a single wiping cycle. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes,
hold the band on mist longer.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If this occurs,
a circuit breaker will stop the wipers until the motor cools.
Use the lever located on the right side of the steering So, be sure to clear any ice and snow from the windshield
column to operate the windshield wipers. wiper blades before using them. If the wiper blades are
frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen them or warm
1(High Speed): Move the lever to this position for the windshield before turning the wipers on. If your blades
steady wiping at high speed. do become worn or damaged, see Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 6-46.
6(Low Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at low speed.
3-9
Rainsense™ Wipers The top position is the highest sensitivity setting, level
five. A single wipe will occur each time you turn the
Your vehicle has Rainsense™ wipers. The moisture delay adjust band to a higher sensitivity level to indicate
sensor for this feature is mounted on the interior side of that the sensitivity level has been increased.
the windshield below the rearview mirror and is used to
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
automatically operate the wipers by monitoring the
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
amount of moisture build-up on the windshield. Wipes
off when going through an automatic car wash.
occur as needed to clear the windshield depending on
driving conditions and the sensitivity setting. In light rain The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are not
or snow, fewer wipes will occur. In heavy rain or snow, affected by the Rainsense™ function. The Rainsense™
wipes will occur more frequently. The Rainsense™ system can be overridden at any time by manually
wipers operate in a delay mode as well as a continuous changing the wiper control to low or high speed.
low or high speed as needed. If the system is left on for When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will
long periods of time, occasional wipes may occur without turn on automatically. If it is dark, they will remain on.
any moisture on the windshield. This is normal and See “Wiper-Activated Headlamps” under Exterior Lamps
indicates that the Rainsense™ system is activated. on page 3-28 for more information.
The Rainsense™ system is also sensitive to vibration.
The system may activate if something hits the Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on
windshield or if the vehicle hits a bump. the exterior glass surface directly in front of
the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause the
The Rainsense™ system can be activated by moving moisture sensor to malfunction.
the wiper lever up to the delay position and turning
the delay adjust band to one of the five sensitivity levels.
The bottom delay adjust position is the lowest sensitivity
setting, level one. This allows more rain or snow to
collect on the windshield between wipes. Turning the
delay adjust band away from you to the higher sensitivity
levels allows less rain or snow to collect on the
windshield between wipes.
3-10
Windshield Washer If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is
low, the message LOW WASHER FLUID will appear on
K(Washer Fluid): The lever on the right side of the the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will
steering column also controls the windshield washer. take 60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this
There is a button at the end of the lever. To spray message to turn off. For information on the correct
washer fluid on the windshield, press the button and washer fluid mixture to use, see Windshield Washer
hold it. The washer will spray until you release the Fluid on page 6-32 and Recommended Fluids and
button. The wipers will continue to clear the window for Lubricants on page 7-11.
about six seconds after the button is released and
then stop or return to your preset speed. Headlamp Washer
The headlamps washer only functions every fourth time
{CAUTION: the washer button is depressed and if the headlamps
are on.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-11
Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
Your vehicle is equipped with cruise control.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
R(On): This position activates the system.
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move the lever to this symbol control on slippery roads.
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
T(Set): Press this button at the end of the lever to control system (if equipped) begins to limit wheel spin,
set the speed. the cruise control will automatically disengage. See
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-9. When road
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
on the accelerator. This can really help on long turn cruise control back on.
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
3-12
Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
{CAUTION: disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
If you leave your cruise control on when you Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
are not using cruise, you might hit a button you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
and go into cruise when you do not want to. resume/accelerate.
You could be startled and even lose control. You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
Keep the cruise control switch off until you stay there.
want to use cruise control.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
1. Move the cruise control switch to on. hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise symbol on the

instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
3-13
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Control Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed: Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Press the set button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. Using Cruise Control on Hills
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds, How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
cruise control will turn off. upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/accelerate. on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
and then release the switch. To increase your speed a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
in very small amounts, move the switch briefly to applying the brake takes you out of cruise control.
resume/accelerate. Each time you do this, your Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. use cruise control on steep hills.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Ending Cruise Control
Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Press and hold the set button until you reach the • Step lightly on the brake pedal
lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press • Move the cruise control switch to off
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go Erasing Speed Memory
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-14
Adaptive Cruise Control a vehicle directly ahead in your path, within a distance
of 328 ft (100 m), and operates at speeds above
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this 25 mph (40 km/h). When it is engaged by the driver,
entire section before using it. the system can apply limited braking or acceleration
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to of the vehicle, automatically, to maintain a selected
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and follow distance to the vehicle ahead. Braking is limited
with Industry Canada. to 0.3 g’s (2.95 m/sec2) of deceleration, which is
comparable to moderate application of the vehicle’s
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. brakes. To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control, apply the
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: brake. If there is not a vehicle in your path, your
1. This device may not cause interference. vehicle will react like traditional cruise control.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device. {CAUTION:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard
1. This device may not cause interference. braking or bring the vehicle to a complete
2. This device must accept any interference received, stop. It will not respond to stopped vehicles,
including interference that may cause undesired pedestrians or animals. When you are
operation of the device. approaching a vehicle or object, Adaptive
Changes or modifications to this system by other than Cruise Control may not have time to slow your
an authorized service facility could void authorization to vehicle enough to avoid a collision. Your
use this equipment. complete attention is always required while
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to traditional driving and you should be ready to take action
cruise control and is not a safety system. It allows and apply the brakes. For more information,
you to keep cruise control engaged in moderate traffic see Defensive Driving on page 5-2.
conditions without having to constantly reset your cruise
control. Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect
3-15
{CAUTION:
• When weather limits visibility, such as
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise Control when in fog, rain, or snow conditions,
may not detect a vehicle ahead. You could Adaptive Cruise Control performance is
crash into a vehicle ahead of you. Do not limited. There may not be enough distance
use Adaptive Cruise Control on winding to adapt to the changing traffic conditions.
roads. Do not use cruise control when visibility
• Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time is low.
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a
crash when you are driving in conditions
where vehicles may suddenly slow or stop Some of the Adaptive
ahead of you, enter your lane, or cross your Cruise controls are located
vehicle’s path. If you are driving in these on the end of the
conditions, do not use Adaptive Cruise multifunction lever.
Control. The warning beep and alert symbol
may indicate that you are driving in
conditions where Adaptive Cruise Control
should not be used. See “Alerting the
Driver” in this section.
• On slippery roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads. 9 (Off): This position turns the system off.
R (On): This position turns the system on.
3-16
S (Resume/Increase): Push the switch to this symbol
to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed
or to increase the set speed when Adaptive Cruise
{CAUTION:
Control is already active.
If you operate Adaptive Cruise Control without
T (Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the
your Head-up Display (HUD) on and properly
speed or to decrease the set speed when Adaptive
Cruise Control is already active. adjusted, your Adaptive Cruise Control
settings will not be visible. You could forget
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control With your settings and be startled by Adaptive
the Set Button Cruise Control response and even lose control.
Keep your HUD on and properly adjusted when
using Adaptive Cruise Control.
{CAUTION:
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control speed you will travel if there is not a vehicle detected
switch on when you are not using cruise, you in your path.
might hit a button and go into cruise when you
do not want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch off until you want to use cruise control.
3-17
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following: This symbol will appear on
the Head-Up Display
1. Make sure the Head-Up Display (HUD) is on and (HUD) to indicate that
properly adjusted. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on Adaptive Cruise Control is
page 3-34 for more information. active. See Head-Up
2. Move the switch to on. Display (HUD) on
page 3-34 for more
3. Get up to the speed you want. information.
4. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so you
5. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. know the speed your vehicle will accelerate to if a
vehicle is not detected in your path. Keep in mind speed
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it may immediately limits, surrounding traffic speeds and weather conditions
apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead is when adjusting your set speed.
too close or moving slower than your vehicle.
If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when the
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically disengage.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-9 and
StabiliTrak® System on page 5-11. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the
Adaptive Cruise Control back on.
3-18
Increasing Set Speed While Using Decreasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase the set speed: Press in the set/decrease button on the end of the
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed. lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator pedal. To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the
You will now cruise at the higher speed. set/decrease button. Each time you do this, your
set speed will be 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
• Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch from on to
resume/increase. Hold it there until the desired set Resuming a Set Speed
speed is displayed in the HUD, then release the
switch. To increase your set speed in very Suppose you set your Adaptive Cruise Control at a
small amounts, move the switch briefly to desired speed and then you apply the brake. This will
resume/increase. Each time you do this, your disengage the Adaptive Cruise Control. But you do
vehicle set speed will increase by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). not need to reset it.
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the system Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
determines there is not a vehicle in front of you. At that you can move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch briefly
point, your vehicle speed will increase to the set speed. from on to resume/increase. Adaptive Cruise Control
will be engaged with the previously chosen set speed.
3-19
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP) The faster the vehicle speed the further back you will
follow. Consider traffic and weather conditions when
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it will selecting the follow distance. The range of selectable
adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the follow distances may not be appropriate for all drivers and
distance (gap) you select. driving conditions. If you choose to travel at a distance
Use the GAP button on farther than Adaptive Cruise Control allows, disengage
the steering wheel to the system and drive manually.
adjust the follow distance.
Press the top of the button to increase the distance or

the bottom of the button to decrease the distance.
The first button press will show you the current follow
distance setting on the HUD. Your current follow
distance setting will be maintained until you change it. A graphic on the HUD indicates the selected follow
distance. This picture shows a maximum follow distance.
There are six follow distances to choose from. The follow The vehicles will move closer as you select a smaller
distance selection ranges from near to far (1 second to follow distance.
2 seconds follow time). The distance maintained for a
selected follow distance will vary based on vehicle speed.
3-20
Alerting the Driver See Defensive Driving on page 5-2 for more information.
The alert symbol will flash
on the HUD and a warning
beep will sound when {CAUTION:
driver action is required.
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited
braking ability to slow your vehicle. In some
cases, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have
time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a
Driver action is required when: collision. Be ready to take action and apply
the brakes yourself. See Defensive Driving on
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient
page 5-2.
braking because you are approaching a vehicle
too rapidly.
• The vehicle speed drops below about
20 mph (32 km/h).
• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise
Control from operating. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-67 for more information.
• A malfunction is detected in the system. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for more
information.
3-21
Approaching and Following a Vehicle Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically slow
your vehicle down when approaching a slower
The vehicle ahead symbol moving vehicle. It will then adjust your speed to follow
will only appear on the the vehicle in front at the selected follow distance.
HUD when a vehicle ahead Your speed will increase or decrease to follow
is detected in your path. the vehicle in front of you but will not exceed the set
speed. The system may apply limited braking if
necessary. When braking is active, your brake lights will
come on. It may feel or sound different than if you
were applying the brakes yourself. This is normal.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly, Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles you
may see ahead.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION: Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is other objects ahead of you. You could crash
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect into an object ahead of you. Do not use
a vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may Adaptive Cruise Control when approaching
not have time to slow your vehicle enough to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
avoid a collision. Do not use Adaptive Cruise objects.
Control when the radar is blocked by snow,
ice, or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See
“Cleaning the System” later in this section.
3-22
Passing a Vehicle
{CAUTION: If you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the
accelerator pedal. While your foot is on the accelerator
pedal, the system will not automatically apply the
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and brakes. Once you pass the vehicle and remove your
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or foot from the accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise Control
other objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may will return to normal operation and be able to apply
accelerate toward objects, such as a stopped the brakes, if needed.
vehicle that suddenly appears after the lead
vehicle changes lanes. Your complete attention
is always required while driving and you should {CAUTION:
be ready to take action and apply the brakes.
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,
the system will not automatically apply the
Low-Speed Deactivation
brakes. You could crash into a vehicle ahead
If your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) while of you. Do not rest your foot on the accelerator
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control will pedal when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
begin to disengage. The driver alert symbol on the HUD
will flash and the warning beep will sound. The driver
must take action since Adaptive Cruise Control will
not slow the vehicle to a stop.
3-23
Curves in the Road
{CAUTION:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle
in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle.
Give extra attention in curves and be ready to
use the brakes if necessary. Select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, Adaptive
Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently in a Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in your
sharp curve. lane and accelerate your vehicle. When this happens,
the vehicle ahead symbol will not appear on the HUD.
The system may reduce your speed in a curve if the
curve is too sharp. The TIGHT CURVE message
will also display on the HUD. See Head-Up Display
(HUD) on page 3-34 for more information.
3-24
Highway Exit Ramps
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set
speed while entering or on highway exit
ramps. You could be startled by this
acceleration and even lose control of the
vehicle. Disengage Adaptive Cruise Control
before entering a highway exit ramp. Do not
use Adaptive Cruise Control while entering or
on exit ramps.
Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle that is not
in your lane and apply the brakes.
Adaptive Cruise Control may, occasionally, provide a
driver alert and/or braking that you consider unnecessary.
It could respond to signs, guardrails and other stationary
objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. Your vehicle does not need service.
3-25
Other Vehicle Lane Changes When going up steep hills, you may want to use the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake to keep your speed
down. Applying the brake disengages the system.
You may choose not to use Adaptive Cruise Control on
steep hills.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
To disengage the system, apply the brake pedal or
move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch to off.
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, Adaptive Cruise Control information will not appear on
Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle until it the HUD when the system is not engaged.
is completely in the lane. Be ready to take action and
apply the brakes yourself. Erasing Set Speed Memory
When you turn the Adaptive Cruise Control switch or
Using Adaptive Cruise Control on Hills the ignition off, the set speed memory is erased.
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are SERVICE
RADAR CRUISE, CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN
RADAR CRUISE. These messages will only appear
to indicate a problem if Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for
How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hills more information.
depends on your speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions You may also see CRUISE SPEED LIMITED displayed
and the steepness of the hills. It may not detect a in the HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-34
vehicle in your lane while driving on hills. for more information.
3-26
Cleaning the System Clean the surface with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl
alcohol and water on a dampened cloth. After cleaning
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice or dirt. the fascia lens, try to engage Adaptive Cruise Control.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean If this does not fix the problem, you may have to remove
the lens. the fascia lens and clean the inside of the fascia lens
and radar lens.
To clean the inside of the fascia lens and radar lens,
insert a screwdriver or similar object into one of the small
slots on the inboard side of the lens and pop the lens out.
Clean the surface with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl
alcohol and water on a dampened cloth. After cleaning
the lens, set the lens back in place and press until it
snaps in.
The lens is located on the driver’s side of the front fascia.
3-27
Exterior Lamps The exterior lamp band has four positions:
O (Off): Turning the band to this position turns off all

lamps.
AUTO (Automatic): Turning the band to this position
sets the exterior lamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending on
how much light is available outside the vehicle. Turning
the band to AUTO mode also enables the Adaptive
Forward Lighting system. See Adaptive Forward Lighting
System on page 3-31.
To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off.
The exterior lamp control is located to the left of the To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exterior
steering wheel on the multifunction lever. lamps and then back to AUTO. Automatic mode will also
reset when your vehicle is turned off and then back
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band with this on again when the control is left in the AUTO position.
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
See Twilight Sentinel® on page 3-32.
3-28
; (Parking Lamp): Turning the band to this position Wiper Activated Headlamps
turns on the parking lamps together with the following:
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
• Sidemarker Lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use for
• Taillamps approximately six seconds and the multifunction lever is
in the AUTO position. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-28.
• License Plate Lamps
When the exterior lamp control has been turned off or
• Instrument Panel Lights is in the parking lamp position and the wiper control
The parking brake indicator light will come on and stay is on delay, low speed or high speed, the HEADLAMPS
on when the parking lamps are on with the engine SUGGESTED message will appear on the Driver
off and the ignition to ACC. Information Center (DIC).
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
5 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this position
headlamps will immediately turn off.
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
3-29
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) When it is bright enough outside, the regular lamps will
go off, and the front turn signal lamps will take over.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
others to see the front of your vehicle during the headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving leave the garage, it will take approximately one
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, your
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual.
first sold in Canada. Make sure your instrument panel brightness knob is
in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
The DRL system will make the front turn signal lamps
Brightness on page 3-33 for more information.
come on when the following conditions are met:
If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on, is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will
• the exterior lamp control is in the off position and display on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC). This
message informs the driver that turning on the exterior
• the transmission is not in PARK (P). lamps is recommended.
When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps will Turning the exterior lamp control to off a second time,
be on. No other exterior lamps such as the parking or turning on the headlamps will remove the
lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the DRL are being HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message. If the parking
used. Your instrument panel will not be lit up either. lamps or the fog lamps were turned on instead,
When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will continue
lamps will turn off and normal low-beam headlamps will to be displayed.
turn on. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-30
Adaptive Forward Lighting System Fog Lamps
The Adaptive Forward Lighting System (AFS) swivels Use fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
the headlamps horizontally to provide greater road conditions.
illumination while turning. AFS will operate when the The fog lamps control is located on the multifunction
vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). AFS will lever next to the exterior lamp control.
not operate when the transmission is in REVERSE (R).
AFS is not immediately operable after starting the -(Fog Lamps): Turning the band to this position will
vehicle; driving a short distance is required to calibrate
turn the fog lamps on.
the AFS. To enable AFS, set the exterior lamp switch
on the multifunction lever to the AUTO position. When you turn the fog lamps on, the fog lamp light will
Moving the switch out of the AUTO position will appear on the instrument panel cluster to indicate
deactivate the system. See Exterior Lamps on that the fog lamps and the parking lamps are on.
page 3-28. If you turn the high-beam headlamps on, the fog lamps
will turn off. They will turn on again when you switch
to low-beam headlamps.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate.
The fog lamps will turn off when the ignition is turned off.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps
to be on along with the fog lamps.
3-31
Twilight Sentinel® You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even when
it is dark outside. After starting the vehicle, turn the
Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and off for you. exterior lamp control band to off, then release it.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the The lamps will remain off until you turn the control band
Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is not covered. to off again.
With Twilight Sentinel® you will see the following happen: Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination as
you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turned
• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal on the lamps when you turn off the ignition, your lamps
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
will remain on until:
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps that
come on with headlamps will also come on. • The exterior lamp switch is moved from OFF to the
parking lamp position, or
• When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will
go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL) will • a delay time that you select has elapsed.
come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch is in the See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-64 to
AUTO position. select the delay time that you want. You can also select
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic no delay time.
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switch
leave the garage, it will take approximately one minute in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL Sentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off as
if it is light outside. During that delay, your instrument soon as the switch is turned off.
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
your instrument panel brightness control is in full As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on headlamp system when you need it.
page 3-33 for more information.
3-32
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver Courtesy Lamps
If the manual parking lamps or headlamps have been left When any door or the trunk lid is opened, the interior
on, the exterior lamps will turn off as soon as the ignition lamps will go on unless it is bright outside.
is turned off or RAP is active. This protects against You can also turn the courtesy lamps on by pressing
draining the battery in case you have accidentally left the the interior lamp button on the right side of the
headlamps or parking lamps on. The battery saver does
instrument panel cluster.
not work if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition
switch is turned to off. Press this button if the courtesy lamps will not go off.
If you need to leave the lamps on, use the exterior lamp
control to turn the lamps back on. Entry/Exit Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
Instrument Panel Brightness entering the vehicle. The interior lamps will come on
The button for this feature is located on the instrument for about 20 seconds when the engine is turned off.
panel to the left of the steering column. You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly turning
+!- (Brightness): Press this button to change the the courtesy lamps on and off.
brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Press the DIMMER button until PANEL DIMMING
Reading Lamps
appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Then Your inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.
use the brightness button to adjust the instrument panel The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When
brightness. Press the top of the button to brighten the the doors are closed, each lamp can be turned on
lights or the bottom of the button to dim the lights. individually by pressing the button for that lamp.
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-34 for more
information.
Be sure not to have the brightness turned all the way
down with the lamps on during the day. Your DIC
may not be visible.
3-33
Battery Run-Down Protection The Head-Up Display (HUD) allows you to see some of
the driver information that appears on your instrument
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from panel cluster.
draining the battery in case the underhood lamp, vanity The information may be displayed in English or metric
mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps, console units and appears as an image focused out toward
or glove box lamps are accidentally left on or in case the front of your vehicle. To change from English
something is plugged into the accessory power outlet or to metric units, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on
cigarette lighter. If you leave any of these lamps on, page 3-64.
they will automatically time-out after about 20 minutes.
To reset it, all of the above lamps must be turned The HUD consists of the following information:
off or the ignition key must be in ON. • Speedometer
• Turn Signal Indicators
Head-Up Display (HUD)
• High-Beam Indicator Symbol
• Tap-Up/Tap-Down Transmission Feature
{CAUTION: • Check Gages Icon
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in

• Adaptive Cruise Control Features and Indicators
your field of view, it may take you more time to • Radio Features
see things you need to see when it is dark
outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.
3-34
The HUD controls are
located to the left of the
steering wheel.
+!- (Brightness): This button is used to adjust the

Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controls brightness of the HUD and the instrument panel cluster.
and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle
without HUD. If you never look at your instrument DIMMER: This button is used to select the HUD or
panel cluster, you may not see something important, the instrument panel cluster to adjust the brightness.
such as a warning light. Under important warning
conditions, the CHECK GAGES message will display in HUD: This button is used to adjust the vertical position
the HUD. View your Driver Information Center (DIC) of the HUD display.
3-35
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do the To turn off the HUD, press the brightness button down
following: until the image disappears.
1. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position. Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image
If you change your seat position later, you may harder to see.
have to re-adjust your HUD. As light shines out from the HUD, it is possible for light
2. Start your engine and press the top or bottom of the to shine back in. In rare occurrences, when the sun
HUD button to center the HUD image in your view. is at a specific angle and position, the sun’s rays can
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down, shine back into the HUD. When this occurs, the display
not side-to-side. device within the HUD will be temporarily illuminated.
The event will end when the vehicle’s angle to the
3. Press the DIMMER button until the DIC reads HUD sun changes.
DIMMING. Then use the brightness button to adjust
the desired intensity. Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by the of the HUD image.
light conditions in the direction your vehicle is facing
and where you have the HUD set. If you are facing a To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
dark object or a heavily shaded area, your HUD soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
may anticipate that you are entering a dark area and it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the
may begin to dim. cleaner could leak into the unit.
3-36
If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD image, The following Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) messages
check to see if: may appear in the HUD:
• Something is covering the HUD unit. CRUISE SPEED LIMITED: This message indicates that
• The brightness is adjusted properly. your vehicle speed has been reduced below your set
speed due to ACC limitations. Your set speed is too high
• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height. and ACC cannot detect other vehicles at far enough
• Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is facing distances for the system to operate properly.
is low. TIGHT CURVE: This message indicates that ACC has
• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers reduced your vehicle speed due to a tight curve in
on page 6-80. the road. Once the road straightens, ACC will return to
your selected set speed or follow distance setting.
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUD See “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” under Turn
system. See Windshield Replacement on page 6-46. Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7 for more
information.
You may also see an ACC active symbol, alert symbol
or vehicle ahead symbol. See “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-7 for more information.
3-37
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist The URPA display is
located inside the vehicle,
(URPA) on the center console.
It has three color-coded
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist can help you to
lights that can be seen
determine how close an object is to your rear bumper
through the rearview mirror
within a given area, making parking easier.
or by turning around.
{CAUTION:
Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
system, the driver must check carefully before
backing up. The system does not operate above
How the System Works
typical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) while URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
parking. And, the system does not detect moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less
objects that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) than 3 mph (5 km/h). When the system comes on, the
behind the vehicle. three lights on the display will illuminate to let you know
that the system is working. URPA senses how close your
So, unless you check carefully behind you vehicle is to an object. The distance is determined by
before and when you back up, you could strike the four ultrasonic sensors located on the rear bumper.
children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind
you, and they could be injured or killed.
Whether or not you are using rear park assist,
always check carefully behind your vehicle
before you back up and then watch closely as
you do.
3-38
When you shift into REVERSE (R) and an object is It may also flash red if the ultrasonic sensors are not
detected, the following will occur in sequence depending kept clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of
on the distance from the object: mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush or materials such as
• At 5 feet (1.5 m) a chime will sound and one amber paint or the system may not work properly. If after
cleaning the rear bumper and driving forward at least
light will be lit;
15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red,
• at 40 inches (1.0 m) both amber lights will be lit; see your dealer. For cleaning instructions, see Washing
• at 20 inches (0.5 m) a continuous chime will sound Your Vehicle on page 6-74.
and all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be lit; and It may also flash red if your vehicle is moving in
REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
• at 1 foot (0.3 m) a continuous chime will sound and Other conditions that may affect system performance
all three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash. include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer or
URPA can detect objects 3 inches (7.6 cm) and wider, the compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) tall, but it cannot detect As always, drivers should use care when backing up a
objects that are above trunk level. In order for the vehicle. Always look behind you, being sure to check
rear sensors to recognize an object, it must be within for other vehicles, obstructions and blind spots.
operating range.
If the URPA system is not functioning properly, the
display will flash red, indicating that there is a problem.
The light will also flash red while driving if a trailer is
attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or object is on
the back of, or hanging out of your trunk. The light
will continue to flash until the trailer or the object is
removed and your vehicle is driven forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h).
3-39
Accessory Power Outlet(s) Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
The accessory power outlet can be used to connect from working as they should. The repairs would not
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
CB radio. exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check with
your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
The accessory power outlet is located inside the center
console storage compartment, on the forward left side. When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. When not
using it, always cover the outlet with the protective cap. We recommend that you see a qualified technician or
your dealer for the proper installation of your equipment.
Notice: When using an accessory power outlet,
maximum electrical load must not exceed 20 amps. Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
Always turn off any electrical equipment when cause damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
extended periods will drain your vehicle’s battery. from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
3-40
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter Climate Controls
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located under a
lid in the front console to the right of the shift lever. Dual Climate Control System
Press the left side of the lid and it will open
automatically. With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
Loose objects, such as paper clips, can lodge behind
and beneath the ashtray lid and prevent movement
of the lid. You should avoid putting small, loose objects
near the ashtray.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is When your vehicle is first started, the system will
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from recall the last temperature fan and mode settings for
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from that driver.
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3-41
Automatic Operation 3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and if necessary.
the temperature is set, the system will automatically
control the inside temperature, the air delivery mode, You can switch from English to metric units through the
the air-conditioning compressor and the fan speed. Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Controls
AUTO will appear on the display. and Displays on page 3-64 for more information.
1. Press the AUTO button. The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C). or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Choosing the warmest or coldest temperature
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
faster. If you set the system at the warmest or
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later
coldest temperature setting, the system will remain
in this section.
in manual mode at that temperature and it will
not go into automatic mode. Manual Operation
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle w PWR x (Power/Temperature): Press the PWR
until warmer air is available. The system will button on the left side of the climate control panel to turn
start out blowing air at the floor but may change the entire climate control system on or off. Press the
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up up or down arrow on the switch to manually increase or
to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
length of time needed for warm up will depend on
the outside temperature and the length of time
that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
3-42
Press the PWR button on the right side of the climate To change the current mode, select one of the following:
control panel to turn the passenger’s climate control
system on or off. Press the up or down arrow on H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
the switch to manually increase or decrease the panel outlets.
temperature for the passenger.
% (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half
If the passenger’s PWR button is off, the driver’s of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
temperature switch controls the temperature for the directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.
entire vehicle. In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
«9ª(Fan): Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancels 6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
automatic operation and places the system in manual floor outlets with some air directed to the side window
mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation. outlets, and a little air directed to the windshield.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is The mode switch can also be used to select the defog
at the highest setting, the passenger compartment air mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
filter may need to be replaced. For more information, be found later in this section.
see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-47
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-4. A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
off the air conditioning compressor. Press AUTO to
ªN« (Mode): Pressing the switch and changing the return to automatic operation. The compressor cannot
mode cancels automatic operation and places the be turned off in either the defrost or floor/defog mode.
system in manual mode. Press the AUTO button to
return to automatic operation.
3-43
( (Heated/Cooled Seat): Press this button to turn the Sensors
feature on. The button on the left controls the driver’s
seat and the button on the right controls the passenger’s There are sensors to measure the temperature and
seat. Each press of the button will take you to a sun’s effect on passenger comfort.
different setting. The settings available in order are The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar
HI HEAT, LO HEAT, OFF, HI COOL, LO COOL radiation then uses the information to maintain the
and OFF. You will be able to feel the temperature selected temperature when operating in AUTO mode by
change in a few minutes. initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the
fan speed and the air delivery system. The system may
The feature will automatically turn off when the vehicle also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing
is turned off. the sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
? (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located on
recirculation mode on or off. The air-conditioning the top of the instrument panel near the windshield
compressor also comes on. This mode keeps outside or the system will not work properly.
air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent There is also a sensor located behind the front bumper.
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to This sensor reads the outside air temperature and
help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle.
The outside temperature will be displayed in the
Recirculation is not available in defrost or floor/defog navigation system only when the engine is running.
modes. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could give a false
Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause reading of the temperature.
the air inside your vehicle to become too dry. To prevent
this from happening, after the air in your vehicle has
cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
3-44
If the outside temperature goes up, the display Defogging and Defrosting
temperature will not change until:
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
• The vehicle’s speed is above 10 mph (16 km/h) for (moisture) condensing on the cool window glass.
five minutes. This can be minimized if the climate control system is
• The vehicle’s speed is above 32 mph (51 km/h) for used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
two and one-half minutes. from your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
These delays prevent false readings. If the temperature passengers. Use defrost to remove fog or frost from the
goes down, the outside temperature will be shown windshield more quickly.
when you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off for
less than three hours, the temperature will be recalled - (Floor/Defog): Press the mode button until the
from the previous vehicle operation. defog mode appears on the display. This mode directs
There is also an inside temperature sensor located to the air between the windshield, floor outlets and
the left of the ignition button. The automatic climate side windows. When you select this mode, the system
control system uses this sensor to receive information, turns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning
so if you block or cover it, the system will not function compressor unless the outside temperature is near or
properly. below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the floor/defog mode.
1 (Defrost): Press this button to direct most of the
air to the windshield, with some air directed to the
side windows. In this mode, the system will automatically
turn off the recirculation and run the air-conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature is near or
below freezing. Recirculation cannot be selected while in
the defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
3-45
Rear Window Defogger The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirrors
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to when the rear window defogger is on.
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger and heated mirrors are
The rear window defogger will only work when the automatically disabled when the retractable hardtop is
engine is running. moving or down.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
as much snow from the rear window as possible. damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
10 minutes after the button is pressed when traveling similar to the defogger grid.
less than 30 mph (48 km/h). If turned on again, the
defogger will only run for approximately five minutes
before turning off. The defogger can also be turned off
by pressing the button again or by turning off the
engine.
3-46
Outlet Adjustment Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Use the thumbwheel to open or close the outlets. The passenger compartment air filter removes certain
odor and particles from the air including pollen and dust
Operation Tips particles. Reductions in airflow, which may occur more
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air often in dusty areas, indicate that the filter may need to
inlets at the base of the windshield that may be replaced early.
block the flow of air into your vehicle. The filter should be replaced as part of the routine
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
adversely affect the performance of the system. on page 7-4 for more information.
• Keep the area around the base of the instrument To check or replace the air filter, do the following:
panel console and air path under the seats clear 1. With the hood open, unlatch and remove the
of objects to help circulate the air inside of access panel.
your vehicle more effectively. The passenger compartment air filter and access
panel are located on the passenger’s side of
the engine compartment near the battery.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12
for more information on location.
2. Pull the old filter out of the housing.
3. Insert the new filter into the housing. The filter should
be fully inserted with the arrows pointing up.
4. Reinstall the air filter access panel.
3-47
Warning Lights, Gages, and Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
Indicators and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
locate them. when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to costly — and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages could also save you your warning lights and gages. They are a big help.
or others from injury.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a that works along with the warning lights and gages.
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-64.
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-48
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to let you know at a glance how
the vehicle is running. You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have left and many other
things you will need to know to drive safely and economically. The instrument panel cluster indicator warning lights,
gages and DIC messages are explained on the following pages.
United States shown, Canada similar
3-49
Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in either The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). of revolutions per minute (rpm).
There is only one scale for mph and km/h. Use Fuel will shut off at about 6700 rpm.
the Driver Information Center (DIC) controls to switch If you continue to drive your vehicle at the fuel shut off
between mph and km/h. See DIC Controls and Displays rpm, you could damage your engine. Be sure to
on page 3-64 for more information. The cluster will operate your vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm or
calculate the proper speed and move the needle to the reduce your rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.
correct position. Either the MPH or the km/h telltale
will illuminate, depending on which measurement you
choose. Safety Belt Reminder Light
The odometer is part of the Driver Information When the ignition button is pressed to START, a chime
Center (DIC). See DIC Controls and Displays on will be provided for several seconds to remind people
page 3-64 for more information. to buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt
light will also be provided and stay on for several
seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should
Trip Odometer buckle your seat belt.
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information This chime and light will be
Center (DIC). See DIC Controls and Displays on repeated if the driver
page 3-64 for more information. remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the

light will be provided.
3-50
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument {CAUTION:
panel, which shows a deployed airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
problem. The system check includes the airbag may not be working properly. The airbags in
modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-32. could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
This light will come on vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
when you start your readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle, and it will flash vehicle.
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
system is ready. when you turn the vehicle on. If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-51
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status to let you know the status of the passenger’s airbags.
indicator. If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger’s
airbags are enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s airbags. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status seat if the airbag is turned on.
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check.
3-52
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
{CAUTION: be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s airbags if
the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, {CAUTION:
no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some If the airbag off indicator and the airbag
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned readiness light ever come on together, it means
off. We recommend that rear-facing child that something may be wrong with the airbag
restraints be transported in vehicles with a rear system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child serviced promptly, because an adult-size
restraint, whenever possible. person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the airbags.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-51.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the passenger’s airbags.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-40 for
more on this, including important safety information.
3-53
Voltmeter Gage Brake System Warning Light
When the vehicle is in Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
accessory mode, the two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
voltmeter shows the still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
voltage output of your you need both parts working well.
battery. When the engine
is running, it shows
the voltage output of the
charging system.
The reading will change as the rate of charge changes United States Canada
(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeter
reads at 9 volts or below, your instrument panel cluster This light should come on when you start the engine.
and other systems may shut down. The Driver If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
Information Center (DIC) will read LOW VOLTAGE be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
when your vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have it If this warning light stays on after you start the engine,
checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading the parking brake may still be set or there could be
at 10 volts or below could drain your battery and disable a brake problem. Refer to Parking Brake on page 2-29
your vehicle. to see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, have
your brake system inspected right away.
3-54
If the light comes on while you are driving and you have Anti-Lock Brake System
a LOW BRAKE FLUID message showing on the DIC,
pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that Warning Light
the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go
closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light With the anti-lock brake
is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. system, the light will come
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-37. on when your engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds.
That is normal.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly If the light stays on, turn the ignition off. Or, if the light
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as possible
with the brake system warning light on can lead and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to
to an accident. If the light is still on after you reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully, again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
have the vehicle towed for service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, you
still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you
do not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with
your regular brakes. See “Service ABS” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-67.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition on. This is normal.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-55
Traction Control System (TCS) You can acknowledge this message by pressing the
RESET button. When the SERVICE STABILITRAK
Warning Light message is displayed, the StabiliTrak® system will not
assist you in controlling the vehicle. You should have the
This light should come on system serviced as soon as possible. Adjust your
briefly as you start the driving accordingly.
engine. If the light does not
come on then, have it When the system is working, you will see the
fixed so it will be ready to STABILITRAK ACTIVE message displayed in the
warn you if there is a DIC. You may also feel of hear the system working.
problem. This is normal.
If you turn off the StabiliTrak® system, by pressing the
The light will also come on while the StabiliTrak® front part of the button on the console for five seconds,
system warms up and the STABILITRAK WARMING the traction control system light will come on, a chime
message will be displayed in the Driver Information will sound and the TRAC/STABILITRAK OFF message
Center (DIC). will be displayed in the DIC. The Traction Control
System will also be turned off. See DIC Warnings and
If it stays on, or comes on and the DIC shows a SERVICE Messages on page 3-67 for more information.
TRACTION SYS message when you are driving, there is
a problem with your TCS and your vehicle needs service. If the StabiliTrak® system and Traction Control System
When this light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. are turned off, pressing the console button momentarily
Adjust your driving accordingly. If the driver turns off TCS will turn both systems on. The DIC will display the
by pressing the button on the console, the TCS system TRAC/STABILITRAK ON message, the instrument
light will come on and the TRACTION SYSTEM-OFF cluster light will be off and a chime will sound.
message will show on the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for
more information.
If the light stays on or comes on while you are driving, a
chime sounds and a SERVICE STABILITRAK message
appears on the DIC, there is a problem with your
StabiliTrak® and the vehicle needs service.
3-56
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Tire Pressure Light
This light should come on
briefly as you start the
engine. It will then
come on only when a
flat or low tire pressure
condition exists.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-55 for

more information.
United States Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.

As the pointer nears 260°F (125°C), your engine coolant
temperature is high. A message may display on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) depending on how high
the temperature is. See DIC Warnings and Messages
See Engine Overheating on page 6-23 for more
information.
3-57
Malfunction Indicator Lamp Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
Check Engine Light your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Your vehicle is equipped Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
with a computer which controls and may cause this light to come on.
monitors operation of the Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
fuel, ignition, and emission repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
control systems. also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 6-3.
This light should come on briefly, as a check to show
This system is called OBD II (On-Board you it is working, as you start the engine. If the light
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to does not come on, have it repaired. This light will also
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner • Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
environment. The Check Engine light comes on to detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
indicate that there is a problem and service is required. may damage the emission control system on your
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also • Light On Steady — An emission control system
designed to assist your service technician in correctly malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
diagnosing any malfunction. Diagnosis and service may be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good,
and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could
lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by
your warranty.
3-58
If the Light Is Flashing A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap
The following may prevent more serious damage to properly installed should turn the light off.
your vehicle:
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
• Reducing vehicle speed
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
• Avoiding hard accelerations will usually be corrected when the electrical system
• Avoiding steep uphill grades dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, See Gasoline Octane on page 6-5. Poor fuel quality will
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
Turn the engine off, wait at least 10 seconds and You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
“If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
still flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
dealer for service as soon as possible. This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If the Light Is On Steady
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
You also may be able to correct the emission system change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
malfunction by considering the following: one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 6-7. the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel any mechanical or electrical problems that may
cap has been left off or improperly installed. have developed.
3-59
Emissions Inspection and Check Engine light, will light up and the ignition will be
on, but the engine will not start — if you press the
Maintenance Programs bottom of the ACC button only briefly, less than
Some state/provincial and local governments have or five seconds, the accessory mode will be turned on, but
may begin programs to inspect the emission control not the ignition. After the bulb check, be sure to press
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this and release the ACC button again to turn the ignition off
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle and avoid draining the vehicle’s battery.
registration. Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
Here are some things you need to know to help your (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
vehicle pass an inspection: emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
Check Engine light is on or not working properly. if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
To perform a Check Engine light bulb check with the battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
keyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in the designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
passenger compartment. See Ignition Positions on during normal driving. This may take several days
page 2-21. Press the bottom of the ACC button on of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
the instrument panel and hold the button down still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
for five seconds. The instrument panel, including the system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-60
Engine Oil Pressure Gage The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display
messages regarding the oil condition. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-67 and Engine Oil on
page 6-13.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States Canada
The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine oil Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa may damage the engine. The repairs would not be
(kilopascals) when the engine is running. covered by your warranty. Always follow the
Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa). maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
In certain situations such as long, extended idles on engine oil.
hot days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and
still be considered normal. It may vary with engine
speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity.
3-61
Security Light Lights On Reminder
For information This light comes on
regarding this light, whenever the
see Theft-Deterrent headlamps are on.
Systems on page 2-18.
United States Only

Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
The fog lamps light will
come on when the fog This light will come on
lamps are in use. when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-31 for more information. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
3-62
Fuel Gage Here are five things that some owners ask about.
All these things are normal and do not indicate that
Your fuel gage tells you anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
about how much fuel you • At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
have left when the the gage reads the full symbol.
ignition is on. • It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage
reads. For example, the gage reads half full,
but it took more (or less) than half of the tank’s
capacity to fit it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate the tank is empty when
the ignition is turned off.
When the needle approaches the low fuel symbol, LOW • The gage reading may change slightly within the
FUEL will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) first several minutes after starting the vehicle.
display. At this time, you still have a little fuel left,
but you should get more soon.
Press RESET to acknowledge a DIC message(s).
Pressing RESET will also turn off a DIC message but
the LOW FUEL message will come on again in
10 minutes if you have not added fuel to the vehicle.
3-63
You can use the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
display more detailed fuel information. While scrolling
Driver Information Center (DIC)
through the DIC, you will also find: This display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver
• AVERAGE XX.X MPG (Average Miles Per Gallon): personalization features and warning/status messages.
The fuel economy calculated for the last 20 gallons
All messages will appear in the DIC display, located
(76 L) of fuel used, or since you last reset the display.
at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
• INST XX.X MPG (Instantaneous Miles Per Gallon):
The fuel economy calculated for your current driving DIC Controls and Displays
conditions.
• RANGE XXX MI: The approximate distance you can The Driver Information
drive before refueling. Center (DIC) buttons are
located to the right of
See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-64 for more the steering wheel on the
information. instrument panel, near
You should reset the fuel information display every time the air outlets.
you refuel. To reset AVERAGE, use the information up or
down button to scroll to AVE FUEL ECON and hold the
reset button. RANGE will automatically reset.
3-64
« 4 ª (Information): Press the top or bottom of this TRIP B: This feature allows you to record the distance
button to scroll through the available features which traveled during a second trip and functions the same
include the odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, miles as TRIP A.
per gallon, average speed, timer, tire pressure, and RANGE xxx MI: This feature shows about how many
remaining oil life. miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive without
+ (Interior Lamps): Press this button to turn the refilling your fuel tank. Once the range drops below
interior lamps on and off. 40 miles (64 km) remaining, the display will show LOW.
OPTIONS: Press this button to choose personal If the vehicle has been idling for a long time, the
options that are available on your vehicle. range displayed on the DIC could be abnormally low.
The vehicle must be driven 5-10 miles (8-16 km) to get
RESET: Press this button to reset a feature. It is also an accurate reading.
used to switch between English and Metric options.
AVERAGE xx.x MPG (Average Miles Per Gallon):
Use the information button to scroll through the This feature shows the approximate fuel economy the
following options: vehicle has averaged since the last time the value
was reset. To reset the average miles per gallon, press
ODOMETER: This feature shows how far the vehicle the information button to display AVERAGE xx.x MPG,
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). then press and hold the RESET button until AVERAGE
Use the ENG/METRIC feature to switch between 00.0 MPG is displayed.
English and Metric units.
INST xx.x MPG (Instantaneous Miles Per Gallon):
TRIP A: This feature will record the distance traveled This feature shows the instantaneous fuel economy
since the last time it was reset. Press and hold the which varies with your driving conditions, such as
RESET button to return to zero. If your vehicle is first acceleration, braking, and the grade of the road being
sold in the United States, the trip odometer will return to traveled. The RESET button does not function in
zero after 999.9 miles (1 609 km). If your vehicle is this mode.
first sold in Canada, the trip odometer will return to zero
after 1,242 miles (1 999 km).
3-65
AVERAGE SPEED: This feature shows the average FRONT Lxx Rxx PSI: This feature shows the tire
speed the vehicle has traveled since the last time pressure for the front left and right tires.
the value was reset. To reset the value, press the
information button to display AVERAGE SPEED, then REAR Lxx Rxx PSI: This feature shows the tire
press and hold the RESET button until AVERAGE pressure for the rear left and right tires.
SPEED 00.0 is displayed. OIL LIFE: This feature shows the estimated oil life
ELAPSED TIME: This feature is like a stopwatch, remaining. See Oil Life Indicator on page 3-82 for more
in that you can clock the time it takes to get from information. To reset the engine oil life system, see
one point to another. Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16. This only needs
to be reset after you have had the oil changed.
To operate, press the information button to display
ELAPSED TIME. Each of the fields for the hours, In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring oil
minutes, and seconds are two numeric digits. life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Once ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00 is displayed, press the Maintenance on page 7-4 and Engine Oil on page 6-13
RESET button to start the timing feature. Press the for more information.
RESET button again to stop it. If you will be starting and
stopping your vehicle, during a trip for instance, the ENG/METRIC (English/Metric): This feature allows
ELAPSED TIME feature will automatically start timing you to switch the DIC displays between English
where it left off when you last stopped. To reset it, press and Metric. Press the RESET button to switch the
and hold the RESET button until the display reads display between English and Metric. There will be an
ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00. Press the information button arrow next to the option that is selected.
to exit from the ELAPSED TIME display.
3-66
DIC Warnings and Messages BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE: This message is displayed
when the vehicle has detected that the battery voltage
These messages will appear if there is a problem is dropping beyond a reasonable point. The battery
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems. You must saver system will start reducing certain features of the
then press RESET to clear the display screen for further vehicle that you may not be able to notice. At the
use. However, be sure to take any message that point that features are disabled, this message is
appears on the display screen seriously and remember displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the
that pressing the RESET button will only make the charge in the battery. Turn off unnecessary accessories
message disappear, not the problem. to allow the battery to recharge.
DIC messages can also be displayed in English, BUCKLE PASSENGER: This message reminds you to
French, German, Italian, and Spanish. buckle the passenger’s seat belt.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ACTIVE: When your This message will display and a chime will sound when
anti-lock system is adjusting brake pressure to help the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, the
avoid a braking skid, the ABS ACTIVE message will be passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled with the passenger
displayed. airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. You should
have the passenger buckle their seat belt.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on, the
The message may stay on for a few seconds after the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
system stops adjusting brake pressure. passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag is
enabled. If the passenger’s seat belt is already buckled,
this message and chime will not come on.
3-67
BUCKLE SEAT BELT: This message reminds you to CHECK GAS CAP: This message will appear if the gas
buckle the driver’s seat belt. cap has not been fully tightened. You should recheck
your gas cap to ensure that it is on properly.
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, CLEAN RADAR CRUISE: This message indicates the
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is disabled
your seat belt. because the radar is blocked and cannot detect vehicles
in your path. It may also activate during heavy rain or
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is on
due to road spray. To clean the system, see “Adaptive
and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will be
Cruise Control (ACC)” under Turn Signal/Multifunction
repeated. If the driver’s seat belt is already buckled,
Lever on page 3-7.
this message and chime will not come on.
This message is an additional reminder to the Safety CLOSE CARGO DIVIDER: This message indicates that
Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster. the cargo divider is not in place. Open the trunk and
See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-50 for more make sure the cargo divider is secure and no objects are
information. on the divider. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-45
CHANGE OIL NOW: This means that the life of the
engine oil has expired. See Scheduled Maintenance on COOLANT OVER TEMP (Temperature): This message
page 7-4. After an oil change, the Oil Life Indicator will appear when the engine coolant temperature is
must be reset. See Oil Life Indicator on page 3-82 and too hot. Stop and allow your vehicle to idle in PARK (P)
Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16. until it cools down and the message is removed. Do
not increase engine speed above a normal idle. If it does
CHARGE SYSTEM FAULT: This message will display not cool down, turn off the engine and have it serviced
when a problem with the charging system has been by your GM dealer before driving it again. Severe
detected. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. engine damage can result from an overheated engine.
See Engine Overheating on page 6-23.
3-68
CRUISE NOT READY: This message indicates that HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED: If it is dark enough
ACC will not activate due to a temporary condition. outside and the headlamps and Twilight Sentinel®
Your vehicle does not require service. If this message controls are off, this message will display on the DIC.
appears when you attempt to activate the system, This message informs the driver that turning on the
continue driving for several minutes then try again to exterior lamps is recommended. It has become
activate the system. dark enough outside to require the headlamps and/or
other exterior lamps. This message will also appear
DRIVER NO. X (1 OR 2): This message will be if the optional Rainsense™ wiping feature is on and the
displayed when the vehicle is started or when there is a Twilight Sentinel® is off.
change of driver. The message will show which driver
is activating the personalization feature. It will only HIGH TRANS (Transmission) TEMP (Temperature):
stay on for five seconds. This message indicates that the transmission fluid
in your vehicle is too hot. Stop and allow your vehicle
ENGINE HOT, STOP ENGINE: This message will to idle until it cools down or until this message is
appear when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn removed.
the engine off immediately to avoid severe engine
damage. See Engine Overheating on page 6-23. HIGH VOLTAGE: This message shows that the
A multiple chime will also sound when this message electrical charging system is overcharging. To avoid
is displayed. being stranded, have the electrical system checked
by your GM dealer. You can reduce the charging
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE ENGINE RPM: If this overload by using the accessories. Turn on the lamps
message appears, the control system has determined and radio, set the climate control on AUTO and the
that continued operation at the existing engine speed fan speed on HI, and turn the rear window defogger on.
may lead to engine overheating. Therefore, you should You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by
lower the engine speed by upshifting the transmission or pressing the information button. The normal range is
drive at a lower speed. 11.5 to 15.5 volts when the engine is running.
3-69
HOT ENGINE–A/C OFF: This message displays when LOW COOLANT: This message will appear when there
the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal is a low level of engine coolant. Have the cooling
operating temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible.
engine, the air conditioning compressor is automatically See Engine Coolant on page 6-20.
turned off. When the coolant temperature returns to
normal, the A/C operation will automatically resume. LOW FUEL: This message will appear when the fuel
You can continue to drive your vehicle. If this message supply is less than 5 gallons (18.9 L) and the display is
continues to appear, have the system repaired by turned off. A single chime will also sound when this
your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid message is displayed.
compressor damage. LOW OIL LEVEL: For correct operation of the low oil
ICE POSSIBLE: This message appears when the sensing system, your vehicle should be on a level
outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road surface. A false LOW OIL LEVEL message may appear
conditions. if the vehicle is parked on a grade. The oil level
sensing system does not check for actual oil level if the
LEFT DOOR AJAR: This message will display anytime engine has been off for a short period of time, and
the vehicle engine is running, the transmission is not the oil level is never checked while the engine is
in PARK (P) and the driver’s door is open or ajar. running. If the LOW OIL LEVEL message appears, and
A chime will sound when the vehicle’s speed is greater your vehicle has been parked on level ground with
than 3 mph (4.8 km/h). the engine off for at least 30 minutes, the oil level should
be checked by observing the oil dipstick. Prior to
LOW BRAKE FLUID: This message will display if the checking the oil level, be sure the engine has been off
vehicle is running to inform the driver that the brake for a few minutes and your vehicle is on a level
fluid level is low. Have the brake system serviced surface. Then check the dipstick and add oil if
by your GM dealer as soon as possible. See “Brake necessary. See Engine Oil on page 6-13.
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6-33.
3-70
LOW OIL PRESSURE: If this message appears while To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
the engine is running, stop the engine and do not you can reduce the load on the electrical system
operate it until the cause of low oil pressure is corrected. by turning off the accessories. You can monitor battery
Severe damage to the engine can result. A multiple voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button.
chime will sound when this message is displayed. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
LOW VOLTAGE: This message will appear when the LOW WASHER FLUID: This message means that your
electrical system is charging less than 10 volts or if vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid. See Windshield
the battery has been drained. If this message appears Washer Fluid on page 6-32.
immediately after starting, it is possible that the
generator can still recharge the battery. The battery MAX (Maximum) SPEED XX MPH (XX KM/H):
should recharge while driving but may take a few hours A failure in the magnetic ride control system has
to do so. Consider using an auxiliary charger to boost occurred when this message appears. The Powertrain
the battery after returning home or to a final destination. Control Module (PCM) determines the speed to
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions. If this which your vehicle is limited. Have your vehicle serviced
message appears while driving or after starting your by your GM dealer if this message appears.
vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediately by
your GM dealer to determine the cause of this problem.
3-71
NO FOB DETECTED: This message is displayed if the • The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
vehicle does not detect the presence of a keyless Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as
access transmitter when you have attempted to start the airports, automatic toll booths, and some gas
vehicle or a vehicle door has just closed. The following stations, have EMI fields which may interfere with
conditions may cause this message to appear: your keyless access transmitter.
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory
power outlet on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these devices are cell
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving
the keyless access transmitter away from these
devices when starting the vehicle. In addition,
PDA devices and remote garage and gate openers
may also generate Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) that may interfere with the keyless access
transmitter. Do not carry the keyless access
transmitter in the same pocket or bag as these
devices.
If moving the transmitter to different locations within

the vehicle does not help, place the transmitter
in the glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons
facing to the right and then press the START button.
3-72
NO FOB, OFF OR RUN?: When this message displays, RIGHT DOOR AJAR: The passenger’s door is open or
it means that the keyless access transmitter is not ajar when this message appears. The vehicle must
detected inside the vehicle while you are trying to turn be running and the transmission not in PARK (P) for this
the ignition off. Your vehicle may be near a strong radio message to display. A chime will sound if the vehicle’s
antenna signal causing the keyless access system to speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
be jammed. The vehicle will remain in ACC until
off or START has been pressed or five minutes has SERVICE A/C: This message appears when the
expired. If you turn the ignition off and you cannot find electronic sensors that control the air conditioning and
the keyless access transmitter, you will not be able heating systems are no longer working. Have the climate
to restart the vehicle. The keyless access transmitter control system serviced by your GM dealer if you
needs to be inside of the vehicle in order for the vehicle notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
to start. See Starting the Engine on page 2-22 for SERVICE ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System): If the
more information. SERVICE ABS message is displayed when you
are driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the
OVER SPEED WARNING: This message is displayed
ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
when the vehicle speed exceeds a certain limit as
system. If the message stays on, or comes back
required by some export countries. A chime will sound
on again while you are driving, your vehicle is in need
when this message is displayed.
of service. See your GM dealer.
PRESS BRAKE TO START: The brake pedal must be If the SERVICE ABS message is being displayed,
applied to start the vehicle. Make sure you are your Traction Control System and StabiliTrak® System
pressing the brake pedal all the way down. will also be disabled. The Driver Information Center
REDUCED ENGINE POWER: This message informs will scroll three messages: SERVICE ABS, SERVICE
you that the vehicle is reducing engine power because TRACTION SYS and SERVICE STABILITRAK, and the
the transmission is being placed in gear under anti-lock brake system and traction control warning lights
conditions that may cause damage to the vehicle’s on the instrument panel cluster will be illuminated.
engine, transmission, or ability to accelerate. See Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-55
and Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light
on page 3-56. The driver can acknowledge these
messages by pressing the RESET button three times.
3-73
When the service message is displayed, the computer SERVICE TRACTION SYS (System): This message
controlled systems will not assist the driver and you indicates there is a problem with the Traction Control
should have the system repaired by your GM dealer as System (TCS). Have your vehicle serviced by your
soon as possible. Adjust your driving accordingly. GM dealer.
SERVICE AFS LAMPS: This message indicates that SERVICE STABILITRAK: If this message appears,
the Adaptive Forward Lighting System (AFS) is disabled it means there may be a problem with your stability
and needs service. See your GM dealer. See Adaptive enhancement system. If you see this message, try to
Forward Lighting System on page 3-31 for more reset the system. Stop, turn off the engine, then start the
information. engine again. If the SERVICE STABILITRAK message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should
SERVICE ELECT (Electrical) SYSTEM: This message see your GM dealer for service. Reduce your speed
will display if an electrical problem has occurred within and drive accordingly. A single chime will also sound
the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Have your vehicle when this message is displayed.
serviced by your GM dealer.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION: This message indicates
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM: The Powertrain Control that there is a problem with the transmission. Have your
Module (PCM) has detected a problem within the fuel vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
system when this message appears. Have your
vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. This message will SERVICE VEHICLE SOON: This message is displayed
also be displayed when the cluster is not getting when a non-emissions related powertrain malfunction
fuel information from the PCM. occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer
as soon as possible.
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE: This message indicates
that the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is SHIFT TO PARK: This message indicates that the
disabled and needs service. See your GM dealer. vehicle is not in PARK (P) when the engine is being
turned off. The vehicle will be in accessory mode.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL: This message indicates Once the shifter is moved to PARK (P), the vehicle will
there is a problem with the Magnetic Ride Control turn off.
System. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
3-74
STABILITRAK ACTIVE: You may see the STABILITRAK WARMING: When you first start your
STABILITRAK ACTIVE message on the DIC. It means vehicle and drive away, especially during cold winter
that an advanced, computer-controlled system has weather, the STABILITRAK WARMING message may
come on to help your vehicle continue to go in be displayed in the DIC along with a chime and the
the direction in which you are steering. This stability traction control warning light. This is normal. You can
enhancement system activates when the computer acknowledge this message by pressing the RESET
senses that your vehicle is just starting to spin, as it button. The StabiliTrak® performance is affected until the
might if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery spot on STABILITRAK READY message is displayed in the
the road. When the system is on, you may hear a DIC, which can take up to 15 minutes.
noise or feel a vibration in the brake pedal. This is
normal. SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR: If this message comes
on, a part on the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is not
When the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message is on, you working properly. If you drive your vehicle while any of
should continue to steer in the direction you want to go. the four sensors are missing or inoperable, the warning
The system is designed to help you in bad weather will come on in approximately 10 minutes. If all
or other difficult driving situations by making the four sensors are missing, the warning will come on in
most of whatever road conditions will permit. If the approximately 15 to 20 minutes. All the sensors
STABILITRAK ACTIVE message comes on, you will would be missing, for example, if you put different
know that something has caused your vehicle to start to wheels on your vehicle without transferring the sensors.
spin, so you should consider slowing down. A single If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be
chime will also sound when this message is displayed. a problem with the TPM. See your GM dealer.
STABILITRAK READY: If this message appears TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP: This message will display
and a chime sounds, the system has completed the when the retractable hardtop button is pressed and the
functional check of the StabiliTrak® System. hardtop pump motor temperature is below −4°F (−20°C).
Wait for the hardtop pump motor to warm up before using
the retractable hardtop.
3-75
TOP INOP (Inoperative) – VALET ON: This message TRAC (Traction)/STABILITRAK OFF: This message
will display when the retractable hardtop button is indicates that both the Traction Control System
pressed and the valet switch is on. Turn off the valet (TCS) and StabiliTrak® are off. The message will remain
switch before using the retractable hardtop. until the systems are turned on again.
TOP INOP (Inoperative) OUT OF PARK: This TRAC (Traction)/STABILITRAK ON: This message
message will display if the retractable hardtop button is indicates that both the Traction Control System
pressed while the vehicle is not in PARK (P). (TCS) and the StabiliTrak® are on.
TOP MOTOR OVER TEMP (Temperature): This TRACTION SYSTEM OFF: This message indicates
message will display when the retractable hardtop button that the Traction Control System (TCS) is off but
is pressed and the hardtop pump motor temperature StabiliTrak® remains on.
is over 221°F (105°C). Wait for the hardtop pump motor
to cool down before using the retractable hardtop. TRACTION SYSTEM ON: This message indicates that
the Traction Control System (TCS) is on.
TOP NOT SECURE: This message will display when the
retractable hardtop button is released before the top open TRUNK AJAR: This message indicates that the trunk is
or close operation is complete. Press and hold the open while the vehicle is running and not in PARK (P).
retractable hardtop button to fully open or close the top. WAIT FOR STABILITRAK: This message will be
TRAC (Traction) SYSTEM ACTIVE: When your displayed after driving 19 mph (30 km/h) for 10 seconds
traction control system is limiting wheel spin, the if the steering is not centered. StabiliTrak® is not
TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE message will be available until the steering centers itself and the
displayed. Slippery road conditions may exist if this STABILITRAK READY message is displayed in the DIC.
message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
This message will stay on for a few seconds after the
traction control system stops limited wheel spin.
3-76
Other Messages • LEFT FRONT TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG
Here are more messages that you can receive on your
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a • LEFT REAR TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
message and read another message that may have REDUCED HNDLG
come on at the same time, press the RESET button. • LOW TIRE PRESS LF
• ACCESSORY MODE ON • LOW TIRE PRESS RF
• CHANGE OIL SOON • LOW TIRE PRESS LR
(See Engine Oil on page 6-13 and Engine Oil Life • LOW TIRE PRESS RR
System on page 6-16.)
• MAX # FOBS LEARNED
• FOB BATTERY LOW
• OFF-ACC TO LEARN
• HIGH TIRE PRESS LF
• READY FOR FOB #X
• HIGH TIRE PRESS RF
• RIGHT FRT TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
• HIGH TIRE PRESS LR REDUCED HNDLG
• HIGH TIRE PRESS RR • RIGHT REAR TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
• INTRUSION SENSOR OFF REDUCED HNDLG
• INTRUSION SENSOR ON • WAIT XX MINUTES
• KNOWN FOB
3-77
DIC Vehicle Personalization is pressed, the DIC does not display the menus used to
set personalizations, but instead displays OPTIONS
Your vehicle is equipped with personalization capabilities UNAVAILABLE for a few seconds.
that allows you to program certain features to a
preferred setting for up to two drivers. The back of the Feature Programming
keyless access transmitters are labelled 1 or 2. To change feature preferences, make sure the vehicle
The current driver’s preferences are recalled when one is running and in PARK (P). Press the OPTIONS
of the following occurs: button and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will
display the current driver for a few seconds, then display
• The lock or unlock button on the keyless access the first personalization menu item. You can now use
transmitter, programmed as 1 or 2, is pressed. the OPTIONS button to change the setting of the
• The appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on displayed feature. Press the top or bottom of the
the driver’s seat is pressed. See Memory Seat, information button to scroll up or down the list of
Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-56 for more features. When you get to a feature you want to change,
information. press the OPTIONS button again. When you are
finished, press the RESET button to exit the
• A valid keyless access transmitter is detected upon personalization menu. If no button is pressed within
opening the driver’s door. 45 seconds, the DIC will exit the personalization menu.
If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is The following are DIC options that will be available
detected upon opening the driver’s door, the driver in the personalization menu.
preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled.
If a keyless access transmitter is programmed as Auto Recall
#3 or #4, the personalization system will not recognize This feature allows the steering column, outside mirrors
the transmitter. The Driver Information Center (DIC) and the driver’s seat to automatically move to the current
will not display a current driver number and the features driver’s set position when the engine starts. The DIC will
that are normally programmed through the DIC will display AUTO RECALL OFF or AUTO RECALL ON.
be set to the default states. Also, if the OPTIONS button Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.
3-78
Auto Exit Recall Exit Lights
This feature allows the steering column and driver’s This feature activates the parking lamps and front fog
seat to automatically move to the current driver’s lamps for 15, 30 or 90 seconds. This will occur when the
exit position when one of the following occurs: vehicle is off or in RAP and the headlamps are on
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP or accessory due to the automatic headlamp system. The parking
lamps and front fog lamps will remain on until the driver
mode and the driver’s door is opened.
selected time period expires, the exterior lamp control
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP and the unlock is activated or the vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.
button on the keyless access transmitter is pressed.
The DIC will display EXIT LIGHTS OFF, EXIT
The DIC will display AUTO EXIT RECALL OFF or AUTO LIGHTS - 15 SEC, EXIT LIGHTS - 30 SEC or
EXIT RECALL ON. Press the OPTIONS button to EXIT LIGHTS - 90 SEC. Press the OPTIONS button
change the setting. to change the setting.
Approach Lights Flash at Unlock
This feature activates the parking lamps, front fog lamps This feature activates the front and rear turn signals for
and back-up lamps during low light periods when the two short flashes when the unlock or trunk button on
unlock button on the keyless access transmitter is the keyless access transmitter is pressed or when
pressed, both doors are closed and the vehicle is off or OnStar® unlocks the doors. This will only occur when
in RAP. The lamps remain on for 20 seconds or until the vehicle is off.
a door is opened, the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off The DIC will display NO FLASH AT UNLOCK or
or in RAP. FLASH AT UNLOCK. Press the OPTIONS button to
change the setting.
The DIC will display APPROACH LIGHTS OFF or
APPROACH LIGHTS ON. Press the OPTIONS button
to change the setting.
3-79
Flash at Lock You may temporarily disable the passive door
locking feature by pressing a door unlock switch for
This feature activates the front and rear turn signals for three seconds while a door is open. Passive door
one long flash when the lock button on the keyless locking will then remain disabled until a door lock switch
access transmitter is pressed. This will only occur when is pressed or until the power mode transitions from
the vehicle is off. If the lock button is pressed again the off power mode.
within five seconds, the horn will sound regardless of
which setting you have selected. You can select to not have the horn sound when the
passive lock occurs. If you choose this setting, the doors
The DIC will display NO FLASH AT LOCK or FLASH will automatically lock eight seconds after you turn the
AT LOCK. Press the OPTIONS button to change ignition off, remove the keyless access transmitter
the setting. from the interior of the vehicle and close both doors.
FOB Reminder You can also select to have the horn sound once when
the passive lock occurs. If you choose this setting,
This feature sounds the horn three times when the
the doors will automatically lock and the horn will chirp
driver door is closed and there is a keyless access
eight seconds after you turn the ignition off, remove
transmitter inside the interior of the vehicle. This will only
the keyless access transmitter from the interior of the
occur when the vehicle is off.
vehicle and close both doors.
The DIC will display FOB REMINDER OFF or FOB
If you are parking in a quiet area and do not want the
REMINDER HORN. Press the OPTIONS button
horn to sound when the doors lock, press the lock button
to change the setting.
on the keyless access transmitter immediately after
Passive Locking removing it from the interior and closing the doors.
This will lock the doors and cancel the passive locking
This feature allows you to select whether the doors for this ignition cycle.
automatically lock when the ignition is turned off,
the keyless access transmitter has been removed from The DIC will display PASSIVE LOCKING OFF, SILENT
the interior of the vehicle, and the doors have been PASSIVE LOCK or HORN AT PASSIVE LOCK.
closed for eight seconds. If a keyless access transmitter Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.
is left inside of the vehicle, the doors will not lock.
3-80
Passive Unlocking Park Assist
This feature allows you to select which doors will This feature tilts the passenger’s side mirror downward
automatically unlock when you approach and open the when the shifter is moved to REVERSE (R). This can
driver’s door with your keyless access transmitter. help you to see the curb while backing up. If you adjust
You can choose to have the driver’s door unlock or both the mirror while in REVERSE (R), the new position
doors unlock. See Door Locks on page 2-9 for more will be saved as the park assist position.
information. The DIC will display PARK ASSIST OFF or PARK
The DIC will display PASSIVE UNLK DRIVER or ASSIST ON.
PASSIVE UNLK BOTH. Press the OPTIONS button to
change this setting. Language
Auto Unlock This feature allows you to select the language the DIC
and Head-Up Display (HUD), uses to display messages.
This feature automatically unlocks either the driver’s The DIC will display ENGLISH, FRENCH, GERMAN,
door or both doors, depending on the setting, when the ITALIAN, JAPANESE or SPANISH. Press the OPTIONS
shift lever is moved to PARK (P). button to change the setting.
The DIC will display AUTO UNLOCK OFF, AUTO If you become stuck in a language that you do not
UNLOCK DRIVER or AUTO UNLOCK BOTH. Press the understand, hold the OPTIONS and RESET button for
OPTIONS button to change the setting. five seconds. The DIC will scroll through all available
languages for as long as the buttons are held.
Each language option will display in its own language.
For example, English will be displayed as ENGLISH,
Spanish as ESPANOL, etc. When the desired language
is available, release the buttons and the DIC will set
to this language.
3-81
Trip Computer Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the
Oil Life Indicator pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
This feature lets you know when to change the engine driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 5-2.
oil. It is based on the engine oil temperatures and By taking a few moments to read this manual and
your driving patterns. get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
To see the display, press the information button several use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
times until OIL LIFE appears. If you see 99% OIL its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
LIFE, 99 percent of your current oil life remains. audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
The DIC may display a CHANGE OIL NOW message.
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
If you see CHANGE OIL NOW, it means the oil life
favorite stations using the presets and steering
is gone. For more information, see Scheduled
wheel controls (if equipped).
Maintenance on page 7-4 and Engine Oil on page 6-13.
When the oil is changed, you will need to reset the
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16. {CAUTION:
Always keep a written record of the mileage and date
when you changed your oil.
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
3-82
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
on page 5-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
system so you can use it with less effort and take full sure that it can be added by checking with your
advantage of its features. dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
distraction while driving.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
While your vehicle is parked: the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls. other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
• Familiarize yourself with its operation. of sound equipment that has been added.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel information.
controls (if equipped).
3-83
Theft-Deterrent Feature Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by g (Voice Recognition): See “OnStar® Steering
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Wheel Controls” under OnStar® System on page 2-37
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different or OnStar® System on page 4-47 for more information.
vehicle, it will not operate. If the radio is removed from
your vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
used to trace the radio back to your vehicle. FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), CD,
or DVD.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen. + u− (Volume): Press this button to increase or to
decrease the volume.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls + 1-6 − (Preset Stations): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset stations
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to the
next track.
3-84
Radio Reception XM™ Satellite Radio Service
You may experience frequency interference and static XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as with
external electronic devices are plugged into the FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static, radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet. out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of
AM XM signal for a period of time. The radio may display
NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station Cellular Phone Usage
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations will boost the power Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels during vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
the night. Static can also occur when things like storms making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
and power lines interfere with radio reception. When this battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio. is an increased level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
FM Stereo unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals

will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-85
Care of Your CDs Diversity Antenna System
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases The AM-FM antennas are located under the decklid
or other protective cases and away from direct surface in the trunk compartment. the antennas
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom are hidden from view and are not accessible.
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will vehicle, do not attach the antenna to the rear glass.
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is This would interfere with the convertible top
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft retraction operation and could cause damage to the
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with finished/painted surfaces.
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by System (Trunk Mounted)
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
Your vehicle may have the XM™ Satellite Radio
the outer edge.
antenna that is located on the trunk of your vehicle.
Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up
Care of the CD Player for clear radio reception.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
lens of the CD optics with lubricants. System (Diversity System)
Your vehicle may have the XM™ Satellite Radio
antennas that are located in the outside rear view
mirrors. These antennas are hidden from view and
are not accessible.
3-86
Section 4 Navigation System
Overview .........................................................4-2 Keyless Access System .................................4-47
Navigation System Overview ............................4-2 OnStar® System ...........................................4-47
Getting Started ...............................................4-4 Global Positioning System (GPS) ....................4-48
Features and Controls ....................................4-10 Vehicle Positioning ........................................4-49
Using the Navigation System ..........................4-10 Problems with Route Guidance .......................4-50
Setup Menu .................................................4-13 If the System Needs Service ..........................4-50
Plan Route ..................................................4-18 Ordering Map DVDs ......................................4-50
Edit Memory Point ........................................4-19 Database Coverage Explanations ....................4-50
Edit Waypoint ...............................................4-23 Navigation Audio System ................................4-51
Edit Avoid Point/Area ....................................4-25 Six-Disc CD Changer ....................................4-66
Enter Destination ..........................................4-27 CD/DVD Player ............................................4-69
Route Preference ..........................................4-36 Radio Personalization with Home and
Maps ..........................................................4-38 Away Feature ...........................................4-74
Symbols ......................................................4-42 Voice Recognition ..........................................4-75
4-1
Overview
Navigation System Overview
4-2
A. BAND Key. See “Finding a Station” under Navigation G. Navigation System Screen
Audio System on page 4-51. H. RPT (Repeat) Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using
B. CD Key. See Navigation Audio System on page 4-51 the Navigation System on page 4-10.
or CD/DVD Player on page 4-69. I. MAP Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
C. DVD Key. See “Playing a DVD” under CD/DVD Navigation System on page 4-10.
Player on page 4-69. J. ROUTE Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
D. TUNE/SEEK Key. See “Playing the Radio” under Navigation System on page 4-10.
Navigation Audio System on page 4-51. K. MENU Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
E. Audio/Adjust Key. See “Main Audio Menu” under Navigation System on page 4-10.
Navigation Audio System on page 4-51. L. TILT Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
F. Power-Volume Knob. See “Hard Keys” under Using Navigation System on page 4-10.
the Navigation System on page 4-10.
4-3
Getting Started Entering a destination or alphanumeric text requires
many steps, so you can only perform these operations
Before you begin to operate the navigation system, read when the vehicle is in PARK (P). You will notice
this manual thoroughly to become familiar with it and that touch-sensitive screen buttons leading to the
to understand how the system works. alphanumeric keyboard are dimmed out while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe Other functions may also be locked out while driving and
driving. See Defensive Driving on page 5-2 for more they too will appear grayed out on the screen — but
information. Get familiar with your vehicle’s navigation all functions are available when parked. Some functions
system so you can use it with less effort and take can be performed while driving, as long as you can
full advantage of its features. Your navigation system do so without diverting too much of your attention from
includes not only navigation, but also audio functions. your driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls: hard
keys on the faceplate and touch-sensitive screen {CAUTION:
buttons.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation. This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
• Set up your audio by presetting your favorite stations, Giving extended attention to entertainment
setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers. Then,
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering wheel or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
controls (if equipped). your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
• Set up the navigation features that can only be done while driving.
before you begin driving, such as entering an
address or a preset destination.
4-4
The information in the system may not always be
complete. Road conditions such as prohibited turns,
{CAUTION: detours, and construction zones, change frequently.
It is important to consider whether you can follow
Looking at the moving map on the navigation the directions given by the system for the current
screen frequently or for too long while driving conditions.
can cause a crash and you or others can be When getting started, you may set the navigation
injured or killed. Keep your eyes and mind on system to your preference using various options.
the road and avoid looking too long or too You will also need to know how to perform various
often at the moving map on the navigation functions to begin route guidance. Reference the
screen. Use the voice guidance directions following topics for further information:
whenever possible. • To adjust screen appearance, language, clock,
English/metric measurements, or other options,
see “Main Audio Menu” under Navigation Audio
The navigation system allows you to do the following: System on page 4-51.
• Plan a route with provided turn-by-turn route • To adjust voice guidance volume or other navigation
and map guidance with voice prompts. See settings, see Setup Menu on page 4-13.
Plan Route on page 4-18 for more information.
• Select a destination using various methods and
choices.
• Receive broadcast announcements on traffic and
emergency alert communications.
4-5
Setting Radio Station Presets Setting the Time
To set preset radio stations, do the following: To set the time, do the following:
1. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on. 1. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on.
2. Press the audio source screen button (AM, FM1, 2. Press the e / z (Audio/Adjust) hard key.
FM2, etc.) and select the desired band (AM, FM1,
FM2, XM1, or XM2 (if equipped), or WX (weather) 3. Press the 8 clock symbol screen button.
(if equipped)). 4. Select the 12H or 24H screen button to display the
3. Use the TUNE/SEEK arrows to tune to the desired time in standard or military time.
station. 5. Press and hold the HOUR and MIN. (minute) arrow
4. Press and hold one of the six preset screen buttons, buttons to increase or to decrease the time.
at the bottom of the screen, until you hear a beep 6. Select the appropriate time zone screen button.
or see the station displayed on the selected
preset button. 7. Select the Daylight Saving Time screen button,
if necessary.
5. Repeat the steps for each preset.
The radio will use the GPS satellite to set the time.
See “Preset Station Menu” under Navigation Audio The vehicle needs to be in an open area to receive the
System on page 4-51 for more information. signal. See “Clock Adjust Menu” under Navigation
Audio System on page 4-51 for more information.
4-6
Setting the Search Area, Entering an 5. Press the Change screen button.
Address and Point of Interest, Storing a 6. Select the appropriate region numbered screen
button that contains your final destination.
Home Destination, and Using Your
The system will return to the Destination menu.
Home or Previous Destinations See Enter Destination on page 4-27 for more
Before entering an Address, Point of Interest, Home, or information.
Preset Destination, select the appropriate region that
contains the final destination. Your vehicle must
Entering an Address
be stopped to perform this operation. To set a destination by entering a street address,
do the following:
Setting the Search Area 1. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on.
To set the search area, do the following: 2. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
1. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on. under Maps on page 4-38 for more information.
2. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps” 3. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
under Maps on page 4-38 for more information. button to proceed.
3. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
button to proceed. press the ROUTE hard key.
If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted, 4. Press the Enter Destination screen button. Verify
press the ROUTE hard key. that the selected Search Area is correct.
4. Press the Enter Destination screen button. 5. Press the Address screen button.
4-7
6. Press the Street screen button, then enter the Entering a Point of Interest (POI)
street name using the alpha keypad on the
screen. To set a destination by entering a Point of Interest
(POI), do the following:
Do not enter directional information or street type,
and use the space screen button between street 1. Press the power/volume knob to turn the system on.
or city names. For example, the street name 2. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
N. Royal Oak Rd. should be entered as royal oak. under Maps on page 4-38 for more information.
Use the backspace ( V ) screen button if an 3. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
incorrect character has been entered. button to proceed.
7. Select the desired street name with the correct If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
designation (Dr., Ln., St., etc.) from the list. press the ROUTE hard key.
8. If there is more than one city, the system will 4. Press the Enter Destination screen button.
display the list of cities that have that street Verify that the selected Search Area is correct.
name. Select a city from the list or select the
City screen button to input the city name. 5. Press the All Points of Interest screen button.
9. Enter the house number using the numeric keypad 6. Enter the specific title of the POI in the Name space
on the screen and touch the Enter screen button. (i.e. Washington Monument) using the alpha
The system will list the house number range that is keypad on the screen.
available for the street. 7. Select the POI from the list.
10. Press the Enter screen button to plan your route. 8. Press the Enter screen button to plan your route.
See “Address” under Enter Destination on page 4-27 for Using the Category or City selections will aid the
more information. system in finding your POI by limiting the search
options.
See “All Points of Interest” under Enter Destination on
4-8
Storing a Home Destination Using Your Home or Previous
1. Press the power/volume knob to turn the system on. Destinations
2. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps” These destinations are available for selection while
under Maps on page 4-38 for more information. driving.
3. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen 1. Press the power/volume knob to turn the system on.
button to proceed.
2. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted, under Maps on page 4-38 for more information.
press the ROUTE hard key.
3. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
4. Press the Edit Memory Point screen button. button to proceed.
5. Press the Home screen button. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
6. Press the Register screen button. press the ROUTE hard key.
Select a method for entering a destination. 4. Press the Enter Destination screen button.
See Enter Destination on page 4-27 for more Verify that the selected Search Area is correct.
information.
5. Select the L (Home symbol) or the Previous
7. Press the Enter screen button to store the Home Destination screen button.
destination.
If the Previous Destination screen button is selected,
The L Home icon will be highlighted on the a list of the last 10 previous destinations will appear.
DESTINATION screen. See “Using Your Home or Select the screen button next to the desired
Previous Destinations” next to use the home or destination.
previous destinations as a route. 6. Press the Enter screen button to plan your route.
See “Home” and “Previous Destination” under Enter
Destination on page 4-27 for more information.
4-9
Canceling Your Current Route Features and Controls
Guidance will be canceled once you arrive at your final
destination. To cancel the current route prior to Using the Navigation System
arrival at the final destination, do the following:
This section presents basic information you will need to
1. Press the ROUTE hard key.
know to operate the navigation system.
2. Press the Route Preference screen button.
Use the keys located on each side of the navigation
3. Press the Cancel Route screen button. screen, as well as the available touch-sensitive screen
4. Press the Yes screen button to confirm cancellation. buttons, to operate the system. See Navigation System
Overview on page 4-2 for more information on location.
Guidance Volume Once the vehicle is moving, various functions will be
To adjust the volume of voice guidance prompts, do the disabled to reduce driver distraction.
following:
Hard Keys
1. Press the MENU hard key.
The following hard keys are located to the left of the
2. Press the ON screen button to turn voice volume on. navigation screen:
3. Select the desired volume or select the OFF screen
BAND: Press the BAND key to access the band screen
button. The system will play back the new volume
and switch between AM, FM1, FM2, XM1, XM2, and
level.
WX, if equipped. See “Finding a Station” under
See “Voice Guidance Volume Settings” under Setup Navigation Audio System on page 4-51.
Menu on page 4-13 for more information.
CD: Press the CD key to play a CD. The CD screen
will be displayed. See Six-Disc CD Changer on
page 4-66 or CD/DVD Player on page 4-69.
4-10
DVD: Press the DVD key to play a DVD. The DVD The map screen can also display the following
screen will be displayed. See CD/DVD Player on information:
page 4-69. • North or Heading Up symbol. See Symbols on
y TUNE/SEEK z: Press the TUNE/SEEK up or page 4-42.
down arrows to go to the next or previous radio station • Map scale. See Maps on page 4-38.
and stay there. See “Finding a Station” under • Distance to destination.
Navigation Audio System on page 4-51.
• GPS symbol if GPS signal is not being received.
e/ z: Press the audio/adjust key to view the main See Global Positioning System (GPS) on
audio menu. See “Main Audio Menu” under Navigation page 4-48.
Audio System on page 4-51. • Options you have selected for reaching your current
PWR-VOL (Power/Volume Knob): Press the destination.
power/volume knob to turn the audio and navigation • Driver Information.
systems on and off. Turn the knob to increase or
decrease the volume to the audio system. • Radio band and presets.
The following hard keys are located to the right of the ROUTE: Press the ROUTE key to display the PLAN
navigation screen: ROUTE menu. See Plan Route on page 4-18.
RPT: Press the repeat key to repeat the current voice MENU: Press the MENU key to display the SETUP
guidance navigation prompt. MENU. See Setup Menu on page 4-13.
MAP: Press the MAP key to view the map screen TILTX: Press the TILT key to open the navigation
showing current vehicle position. system faceplate for loading or removing the map DVD,
a video DVD, or an audio CD. This key can only be
used while the vehicle is in PARK (P).
4-11
Alpha-Numeric Keypad To make your name selections easier, the system will
only allow you to select a character which can follow the
Letters of the alphabet, symbols, punctuation, and last one entered. For example, if you enter Z, you would
numbers, when available to you, will be displayed on not be allowed to follow it with T. The system will
the navigation screen as an alpha or numeric keypad. highlight the available characters and darken the
The alpha keypad will be displayed when the system unavailable characters.
needs you to input a city or street name. You can also
touch Char at the bottom of the alpha keypad to If you are unsuccessful when inputting a name, it may
access the numeric keypad when inputting a house need to be selected differently. It is also possible that the
address, punctuation mark, or other character. map DVD database may not contain that information
Touch A - Z to return to the alpha keypad. or the correct search area has not been selected.
See Database Coverage Explanations on page 4-50
All characters are touch-sensitive screen buttons. for more information.
Touch a character to select it.
Select the space symbol to enter a space between
Touch Sensitive Buttons
characters or the words of a name. Touch-sensitive buttons, or screen buttons, are located
V: Select the backspace symbol if you have selected on the screen. When you have successfully selected
a screen button, a beep will be heard. These buttons will
an incorrect character.
be highlighted when a feature is available and dim
when they are unavailable. There are some toggle
screen buttons that will be light blue when active and
dark blue when inactive.
4-12
Setup Menu Navigation Settings
MENU: Press the MENU key located to the right of the This menu allows you to change the following options
navigation screen to access the SETUP MENU. for the navigation system.
The SETUP MENU allows you to adjust such things as

Restore Default Settings
map appearance, navigation settings, and voice This feature will automatically reset the system to the
guidance volume. default values.
To restore the default settings, do the following:
1. Touch the Restore Default Settings screen button.
2. Touch Enter.
3. Touch Return to exit this menu.
4-13
System Configuration 5. When you have set the vehicle to the correct
direction, touch Enter. Relocation Complete
This feature allows you to reconfigure the navigation will be displayed.
system. If you begin to drive your vehicle during
this procedure, the system will not be able to adjust the 6. Touch Return to exit this menu.
position or direction of your vehicle.
Calibrate Vehicle Speed Signal: If there are tire
Touch the System Configuration screen button to view pressure differences or if a spare tire is installed, the
the following choices: navigation system will automatically recalibrate the
system. You may also choose to calibrate it yourself by
Adjust Vehicle Position: To correct the position of
doing the following:
your vehicle on the map or to change vehicle position,
do the following: 1. Touch Start to begin calibration.
1. Touch the Adjust Vehicle Position screen button. 2. Touch Return to exit this menu.
The system will display Position Adjustment.
The vehicle location symbol and the scroll symbol Time to Destination
will appear on the map. This feature allows you to view the estimated time to
2. Use the scroll symbol and the zoom in/zoom out travel from your current position to the destination, and
feature to locate the vehicle position on the map. to reset the average speed to factory default settings.
Estimated travel time is based on calculated route
3. Touch Enter to set the vehicle position. The system information and the vehicle’s average speed. Touch ON
will display Position Adjustment and two arrows will to turn this feature on, OFF to turn this feature off, or
appear on the map screen. Reset to restore vehicle speed default settings. With this
4. Touch the arrows to adjust the direction of the feature on, the estimated travel time to destination will
vehicle. As you touch the arrows, you will see display along with the distance to destination.
the vehicle symbol direction changing.
4-14
Quick POI (Point of Interest) Selection 2. Select a Quick POI category from the Quick POI
selection menu list. The system will return to the
This menu allows you to choose a point of interest (POI), Quick POI selection screen when a POI is selected.
such as gas stations, restaurants, hotels, etc. to be
displayed on the map screen. You can also set a 3. Touch Return to save the setting and return
destination to a specific POI. to previous menu.
Displaying Quick POI Icons
To display POI icons of a category on the map screen,
do the following:
1. Touch the map screen once.
2. Touch the POI button. The Quick POI Selection list
will be displayed.
3. Select a category type or touch List Categories Or
All Local POIs to display the icons of the selected
category on the map screen.
Removing Quick POI Icons
To remove POI icons from the map screen, do the
following:
Setting the Quick POI menu 1. Touch the map screen once.
To set the Quick POI list displayed on the map screen, 2. Touch the POI OFF screen button. The current POI
do the following: icons will be removed from the map screen.
1. Select the category you would like to replace.
4-15
Setting a Destination Using Quick POI Guidance Appearance
This feature will allow you to choose a POI as your This menu allows you to set the guidance appearance
destination. To set a destination using a POI, screen options. This screen is displayed on the map
do the following: while on a planned route. The current settings will
1. Touch the POI icon on the map screen that you appear as light blue.
wish to set as a destination.
The selected icon will be surrounded by a blinking
box, and the name of the icon will be displayed.
You may also touch INFO to view the POI name,
address, city, and phone number, if available.
2. Touch the ENT DEST screen button.
If a final destination has already been entered, you
can add the POI as a waypoint. See Edit Waypoint
3. Touch Enter to start planning your route.
4. To start route guidance, touch Start or begin driving
the vehicle. Route guidance will automatically begin
after a short distance.
If you wish to cancel the route you have just set,
do the following: Split Map: Select this feature to display the guidance
screen on the map at all times.
1. Press the ROUTE hard key.
2. Touch the Route Preference screen button. Full Screen: Select this feature to display the guidance
screen on the map when approaching a maneuver.
3. Touch the Cancel Route screen button.
4. Select YES to cancel or NO to continue.
4-16
Turn List: Select this feature to have the guidance Map Appearance
screen display several upcoming turns. Directional
arrows, street name, and distance to the next turn will This menu allows you to set the map appearance screen
be displayed. As you approach the next turn, the system options. The current setting will appear as light blue.
will display a closer view of the upcoming maneuver.
Arrow: Select this feature to have the guidance screen
display the next turn. A directional arrow, street
name, and distance to the turn will be displayed. As you
approach the turn, the system will display a closer
view of the upcoming maneuver.
2D: Select this feature to display the guidance screen
as a two-dimensional view.
3D: Select this feature to display the guidance screen
as a three-dimensional view.
2D: Select this feature to display the map as a

two-dimensional view.
3D: Select this feature to display the map as a
three-dimensional view.
4-17
Set 3D Viewing Angle: This feature allows you to Plan Route
adjust the 3D viewing angle. To do so, do the following:
1. Touch 3D on the MAP APPEARANCE menu. To plan a route, press the ROUTE key. The PLAN
ROUTE menu will be displayed.
2. Touch Set 3D Viewing Angle.
The map screen with the 3D viewing angle bar will
be displayed.
3. Touch the up or down arrows to set the viewing angle.
4. Touch Return to save your settings and to exit this
menu or touch Reset to restore the viewing angle
to the default setting.
Voice Guidance Volume Settings
This feature allows you to set the voice prompt volume
level or to turn voice prompts on or off.
Set the voice prompt volume level by touching the
numbered buttons to increase or decrease the volume
level. You may also choose to turn the voice prompts off.
Then touch Return to save your setting and to return You may use one of several destination entry methods
to the SETUP MENU. to plan a route. See Enter Destination on page 4-27
If a voice prompt is active while the audio system is on, for more information.
the audio system volume will decrease and the voice
prompt will be heard through the driver’s side front
speaker.
Voice prompts will not be heard while using voice
recognition.
4-18
Edit Memory Point Memory points are stored when you select either
START or MARK when setting a destination on the map
This feature allows you to store, delete, and edit or when you are storing destinations in memory.
memory points. Touch the Edit Memory Point screen A total of 60 locations can be stored. The last
button from the PLAN ROUTE menu to access the 10 destinations entered will be stored under Previous
EDIT MEMORY POINT screen. Destination. In addition, one memory point can be stored
under the Home category.
If all 60 stored points are entered, the system will notify
you that there is no available storage left in memory
points. A memory point must be removed before storing
additional memory points.
Registering Memory Points

To store a memory point, do the following:
1. Select a category from the EDIT MEMORY
POINT menu.
2. Touch REGISTER.
3. Select a method for entering a destination. A map
will appear displaying the memory point’s location.
You can store memory points in four different categories, 4. If available, touch INFO to view the address
personal, business, entertainment, and marked point. information for the memory point.
5. Touch Enter to store the point.
4-19
Editing Memory Points Name Editing of a Memory Point
This feature allows you to edit the contents stored in To modify the name of a stored memory point, do the
memory. The following options are available: following:
1. Select the category of the memory point.
Icon Editing of a Memory Point
2. Select the item you want to edit.
Each memory point is displayed with a default icon.
To edit an icon, do the following: 3. Touch the NAME screen button and use the alpha
keypad to edit the name. Names may contain up to
1. Select the category of the memory point. 15 alpha and/or numeric characters.
2. Select the item you want to edit. 4. Touch Return to go to the previous screen.
3. Touch the icon. The EDIT MEMORY POINT icon
screen will appear. Moving Memory Points
4. Touch the icon you would like to use. The system To move a memory point from one category to another,
will then return to the EDIT MEMORY POINT menu. do the following:
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen. 1. Select the category of the memory point.
You will see the new memory point icon on the map. 2. Select the memory point you want to edit.
When selecting an icon, you can choose from 3. Touch CATEGORY. A list of categories will appear.
18 different icons, three of which are sound icons. The current category for the item will be highlighted
The same icon may be used for other memory points and cannot be selected.
as well. 4. Touch the screen button for the category you want
the memory point placed in. A pop-up window will
appear displaying the change in category.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-20
Adjusting a Memory Point Deleting Single Memory Points
To relocate a memory point’s location, do the following: To delete a single memory point, do the following:
1. Select the category of the memory point. 1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Select the memory point you want to edit. 2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT.
3. Touch POSITION. A map screen with the position 3. Select the category of the memory point.
of this memory point will appear. 4. Touch DELETE.
4. Touch anywhere on the screen to activate the scroll 5. Select the memory point you want to delete.
feature and relocate the memory point. See Maps A confirmation window will appear.
on page 4-38.
6. Touch YES to delete the memory point or NO
5. Touch Enter to save the memory point’s new to return to the previous menu.
location.
Changing the Phone Number of a Deleting All Memory Points
Memory Point To delete all of the memory points in a category,
do the following:
To edit or add the phone number of a memory point,
do the following: 1. Press the ROUTE key.
1. Select the category of the memory point. 2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT.
2. Select the memory point you want to edit. 3. Select the desired category.
3. Touch PHONE and use the numeric keypad to edit 4. Touch the DELETE ALL screen button.
or add the number. A confirmation window will appear.
4. Touch the RETURN button to take you back to the 5. Touch YES to delete the memory points or NO to
previous screen when you have finished. return to the previous menu.
4-21
Edit Category Previous Destination Memory
To edit the name of a category, do the following: Each time you select Start from the map screen, that
destination will be stored as a memory point under
1. Press the ROUTE key. PREVIOUS DESTINATION. This category will store up
2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT. to 10 destinations.
3. Select the category you want to edit. When the Previous Destination category contains more
4. Touch the EDIT CATEGORY screen button and than 10 destinations, the system will remove the
use the alpha keypad to edit the category name. oldest destination stored and add the most recent one
selected to the list.
The name can consist of up to 15 alpha and/or
numeric characters. If you do not want a previous destination to be lost,
you must move the destination into a memory point
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen. category. See “Moving Memory Points” earlier in this
Marked Point section for more information.
A marked point is a memory point which has been Home Memory

stored by selecting the MARK screen button while This memory point is stored by selecting Home from
traveling on a planned route. You can also use the scroll the EDIT MEMORY POINT screen. See “Registering
feature to plan a destination on the map after reaching Memory Points” earlier in this section and “Home” under
the destination, or by moving a memory point to a Enter Destination on page 4-27 for more information.
marked point category. See “Editing Memory Points”
earlier in this section for more information.
4-22
Edit Waypoint Adding a Waypoint
Waypoints are destinations you can set along the way To add a waypoint to your route, do the following:
to your final destination. This feature allows you to 1. Touch Add Waypoint.
add, edit, and delete waypoints.
2. Enter a destination. See Enter Destination on
page 4-27.
A map will appear showing the location of the
waypoint.
3. Touch Enter to add your waypoint.
4. Touch the ADD screen button to insert the waypoint
in the desired order.
5. The system will display the ROUTE INFORMATION
screen. From this screen, several options are
available.
You may set up to five waypoints on the way to your

final destination.
To access the WAYPOINT menu, do the following:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch Edit Waypoint.
4-23
Delete: Touch Delete to delete a waypoint or the
final destination. A confirmation window will appear.
Touch YES to delete the point or NO to return to
the previous screen.
Delete All: Touch Delete All to delete all of the
waypoints and the final destination. A confirmation
window will appear. Touch YES to delete all waypoints
or NO to return to the previous screen.
Change: Touch Change to change the final destination.
Enter a destination. See Enter Destination on
page 4-27.
Add: Touch Add to add additional waypoints. Refer to
the steps for adding a waypoint listed previously in
List: Touch List to view the waypoint on the map or to this section.
change the order of the waypoints and final destination.
To change the order, touch CHG ORDER, then touch Calculate: Touch Calculate to begin route calculation.
the blank screen button next to the destination to select This feature will only be available if the final destination
the order of the waypoints and final destination. Press has been set.
the MAP key to view the destination and waypoints
on the map screen.
4-24
Editing a Waypoint Edit Avoid Point/Area
This feature allows you to edit waypoints that have From this menu you can register, edit, and delete an
already been set. To edit a waypoint, do the following: area to be avoided while planning a route. These areas
1. Touch Edit Waypoint. can also be saved so the system can automatically
avoid them when planning a route.
2. Touch the MAP key to view the destination location
on the map screen.
3. Touch CHANGE ORDER to change the order of the
waypoints and the final destination.
You can also use the map scroll to change a
waypoint from one location to another.
Deleting a Waypoint
To delete a waypoint from your route, do the following:
1. Touch Delete Waypoint.
2. Select the waypoint you want to delete.
A confirmation window will appear.
3. Touch YES to delete the waypoint or NO to return
to the previous menu. To access the AVOID POINT/AREA menu, do the
following:
2. Touch Edit Avoid Point/Area.
4-25
Registering an Avoid Point/Area Editing an Avoid Point/Area
To store an avoid point/area, do the following: To edit an avoid point/area, do the following:
1. Touch Register Avoid Point/Area. 1. Touch Edit Avoid Point/Area. A list of avoided
points will appear.
2. Enter a location. See Enter Destination on
page 4-27. 2. Select the avoided point/area you want to change.
A map of the avoided area will appear.
3. If desired, reduce or enlarge the area around the
point you want to avoid by using the REDUCE or 3. Use REDUCE or ENLARGE to edit the avoided point.
ENLARGE screen buttons. 4. Touch Enter to set your new avoided area.
If an avoid point cannot be avoided, the system will The system will display “Area Adjusted.”
display “Avoid Point and Area Stored. Route 5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
May Not Avoid the Avoid Point and Areas.”
4. Touch Enter to set the area as an avoid point area. Deleting an Avoid Point/Area
When using the REDUCE or ENLARGE buttons, To delete an avoid point/area, do the following:
a box will appear to represent the area or an X will
1. Touch Delete Avoid Point/Area. A list of avoided
appear to represent the area avoided. When an
points will appear.
avoid point is set, the square will appear as green.
2. Select the avoided point/area you want to delete.
3. The system will ask you to confirm your selection.
Touch Yes to delete the avoid point/area or No to
cancel.
If Yes is selected, the area will no longer be
avoided when traveling on a planned route.
4-26
Enter Destination To enter a destination, choose from one of the
destination entry methods following in this section.
The DESTINATION menu will give you several ways to After entering a destination, If available, the system
plan a route. Touch the Enter Destination screen will display up to three routes in a pop-up window
button from the PLAN ROUTE menu to display the indicating the total mileage and time to destination for
DESTINATION menu. each route. Select a route by touching NEXT. The map
will display each route in a different color. The selected
route will be highlighted in red.
To start route guidance, touch Start or begin driving
your vehicle. Route guidance will automatically begin
after a short distance.
If you touch CHG ROUTE before touching Start, you will
be able to change route preferences. See Route
Preference on page 4-36 for more information.
When a route has been planned, it will be highlighted
and a bulls-eye symbol will appear on the map to show
your final destination.
If you wish to cancel a route that has been set, see
“Cancel Route” under Route Preference on page 4-36.
For destination entry methods listed on the second page
of the DESTINATION menu, touch the Next Page arrow.
Touch the Prev. Page arrow to return to the first page.
4-27
Easy Planning Route To use this destination entry method, do the following:
With this destination entry method, you can select a 1. Press the MAP key.
destination using the scroll symbol on the map screen. 2. Touch the map screen twice for the scroll symbol to
See Maps on page 4-38. appear. Touch the map or drag the scroll symbol
toward your destination.
3. Touch the map screen continuously to scroll
through the map faster. The address of the location
on the map will appear at the top of the screen.
If needed, use the zoom feature to locate your
destination. See “Map Scales” under Maps
4. Touch ENT DEST to set this location as your
destination. You may also touch MARK to store this
location as a memory point.
5. Touch Enter to plan your route.
4-28
Address To use this destination entry method, do the following:
This destination entry method allows you to input an 1. Enter the street name using the alpha keypad.
address by providing the system with a house number, See “Alpha-Numeric Keypad” under Using the
Navigation System on page 4-10 for more
street name, and city. Select Street to begin entering
the desired address. information.
Do not include name extensions such as N. or Drive.
For example, the street name N. Civic Center Drive
should be entered as Civic Center. As information is
entered, the system will automatically search for
available names, and List will become available.
2. Touch List to view name choices or continue to
spell the street name to further reduce the number
of available items. Select a street name.
3. If the street name you entered exists in more than one
city on the DVD database, a list of cities will appear.
You can select a city from the list, or enter the city
name by selecting City. As you begin to enter the city
name, you can select the desired city from the list
which will appear, or continue to spell the city name
to further reduce the number of available items.
4. Once the city name has been selected, enter the
house number using the numeric keypad.
The system will list the house number range that is
available for the street.
5. When you have finished entering all of the address
information, touch Enter to plan your route.
4-29
All Points of Interest You may search for a POI using the following
three methods:
This destination entry method allows you to choose
a destination from the point of interest (POI) list. • Touch NAME to type in a POI by name using the
Selecting All Points Of Interest from the DESTINATION alpha key pad. As you type in a name, the system
menu will bring up the alpha keypad. While inputting a will search for an available match to your input.
POI or city name, the List option will become available. Select the desired POI.
As information is entered, the system will search for • Select a POI by touching CATEGORY. Use the
available POI and city names based on the information arrows to scroll through the categories listed.
given. The system will supply a list of names to make a Select a category along with any appropriate
selection from when the choices are five or less. sub-categories. If the list of available POIs for the
selected category is too long, you may need to enter
the POI’s name or city.
• Select CITY, then type in the city you wish to select
a POI from. Choose a city from the list of cities that
will appear. If the list of POIs for the selected city
is too long, enter the POI’s name or choose a
category.
4-30
While inputting a POI or city name, the List option will Memory Points
become available. Touch List to view the list of
name choices, or continue to spell the name to further This destination entry method allows you to set a
reduce the list of available items. memory point as your destination. Each time you store
a destination from the map screen, the destination
The system will list all POIs available. You can sort by is stored under MARKED POINT. See Edit Memory
name using NAME SORT or touch DIST SORT to Point on page 4-19 for more information.
list POIs by distance from your current location.
You must have destinations stored as memory

Select a location from the list. The system will show the points to select from PERSONAL, BUSINESS,
selected POI on the map. If available, a pop-up ENTERTAINMENT, or MARKED POINT. If you have
window will be displayed. Touch INFO to view the POI’s renamed the memory point category name(s), the
name, address, city, and phone number, if available. name(s) will appear as you changed them.
Touch Enter to plan your route.
4-31
To select a destination using this entry method, To select a previous destination, do the following:
do the following: 1. Touch the Previous Destination symbol.
1. Touch the Memory Points symbol. 2. Touch the screen button next to the desired
2. Select a category. destination to select it.
3. Select a destination. Use the arrows to scroll through Use the arrows if necessary to view the entire list of
the memory points. They can be sorted by date, previous destinations.
name, distance, and icon. 3. Touch Enter to plan your route.
Previous Starting Point
Previous Destination This destination entry method allows you to select the
This destination entry method allows you to select a last start point as your destination. To select the
destination by choosing from a list of the last previous start point as your destination, do the following:
10 destinations entered into the system.
1. Touch Previous Destination.
2. Touch the Previous starting point screen button.
4-32
Home Set by Map
This destination entry method allows you to select a This destination entry method allows you to select a
destination that has been previously stored as Home. destination by using the scroll symbol.
To choose Home as your destination, do the following: To use this feature, do the following:
1. Touch the Home symbol. 1. Touch the Set By Map symbol. Current vehicle
2. Touch Enter to plan your route. position will be shown on the map screen.
2. Use the scroll symbol to select the desired
destination. The zoom in and zoom out feature can
be used to assist you in finding the desired location.
See “Map Scales” under Maps on page 4-38.
4-33
Freeway Entrance/Exit 3. Touch List to view the list of available name choices
or continue to spell the name to further reduce the list
This destination entry method allows you to select either of available items. The system will supply a list of
a freeway entrance or an exit as a destination. names when the choice is five or less.
If you are unsuccessful when inputting a name, the
name may need to be input differently, the map
DVD database may not contain this information, or
the name may be misspelled.
4. Select a freeway from the list.
5. The ENTRANCE or EXIT options will appear.
Choose ENTRANCE to select the entrance to
the freeway, or EXIT to select the exit ramp of
the freeway.
When either button is touched, it will give an
alphabetical list of freeway entrance and exit ramps
on the freeway you entered. You may touch
DIST SORT to sort the list by distance from your
To enter a freeway name, do the following: current location, or NAME SORT to sort the
1. Touch the Freeway Entrance/Exit symbol. list by name.
2. Enter the freeway name using the alpha key pad. 6. Select the desired freeway entrance or exit from the
Freeways sometimes have a name and a number list. A map will appear with the destination shown.
associated with them which you may need to 7. Touch Enter to plan your route.
refer to when entering freeway information.
Freeways are also referred to by their abbreviated
names. For example, Interstate 75 in the U.S.
is selected by entering I-75.
As you enter a freeway name, the List option will
become available.
4-34
Intersection 3. To view a list of choices, touch List or continue to
spell the name to further reduce the list of available
This destination entry method allows you to select a items. The system will display a list of the
destination by inputting the intersecting roads you wish intersecting streets if the number of intersecting
to travel to. streets is five or less.
4. Select the first street.
5. Now enter the second street name.
6. Select the second street name from the list of
intersecting streets. To view a list of choices,
touch List or continue to spell the name to further
reduce the list of available items. The system
will display a list of intersecting streets if the number
of intersecting streets is five or less.
If there are multiple intersections with the same
two roads, the system will display a list of cities to
choose from. Choose a city from this list. A map with
the intersections for that city will appear.
To enter an intersection, do the following:
1. Touch the Intersection symbol.
2. Using the alpha keypad, enter the name of the first
street in the intersection.
4-35
Route Preference The following options will be available from the ROUTE
PREFERENCE menu:
To change your planning options, use the following
instructions. Detour
This feature allows you to choose a distance in
miles/kilometers to detour. Select the detour distance
desired for residential roads and freeways.

2. Touch Route Preference.
The system will retain these settings for the next time
you use Detour, unless you change them.
You may also touch Alternate to provide a new route
that does not use previously stored detour settings.
Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-36
Route Setting The following options will be available from the ROUTE
SETTING menu:
This feature allows you to display and change the
planning methods used each time you plan a route. Minimize Time/Distance: The system will calculate the
With planning method options, you are able to select the fastest route or shortest route possible. Choose Time
fastest route based on time or distance, using only for the fastest route or Dist for the shortest route.
major roads, toll roads, and using ferries based on the
navigation system’s information and information Use Major Roads: Choose Yes to calculate the best
contained on the map DVD. route using only major roads unless a route cannot
be found without the use of a secondary road.
This selection will not always offer the shortest distance
or time to your destination.
Use Toll Roads: Choose Yes to calculate the best
route using toll roads wherever possible. This selection
will not always offer the shortest distance or time to
your destination.
Use Ferries: Choose Yes to calculate the best route
using ferries when possible. This selection will not
always offer the shortest distance or time to your
destination.
4-37
Display Whole Route Maps
This feature allows you to display your entire planned This section includes basic information you need to
route. Total mileage and time to destination for the know about the map database.
planned route will be displayed on the map screen.
Touch Return to go back to the previous menu. Regional Maps
Calculate Route The maps are stored on a DVD-ROM. The
48 contiguous United States and portions of Canada are
This feature allows you to begin route calculation for the contained on one disc. The U.S. map database
selected destination. includes interstate freeways, state highways, country
roads, and major and general streets.
Cancel Route
Refer to the “Navigation System Map Disc” manual to
If you are traveling on a planned route and would like to view the explanation of map coverage and detailed
cancel it, touch Cancel Route. The system will ask city lists in each region. The map disc manual will be in
you to confirm by touching YES. Touch YES to confirm your map DVD case when the vehicle is delivered
cancellation of your planned route or touch Return to from the factory.
keep your planned route.
4-38
When your vehicle is delivered from the factory, the Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) with the system’s
dealer may have installed the map DVD. If the map DVD faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
was not installed in your vehicle when first purchased, automatically. This could cause damage to a CD,
do the following: DVD or the system if it is partially loaded. Before
1. Turn the ignition on. shifting out of PARK (P), make sure that the DVD or
CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must be shifted
2. With the vehicle in PARK (P), press and hold the back into PARK (P) to close the faceplate.
TILT key until a beep is heard. The system’s
faceplate will open. Once the map DVD is inserted correctly, you will have
the following two choices:
3. If already loaded, the map DVD or a CD will eject
from the slot. • LANGUAGE
4. Load the map DVD into the slot by inserting it • I AGREE
partway. The system will pull it in. You can change the language at this time. See
5. Press and release the TILT key to close the “Language” under Navigation Audio System on
faceplate. page 4-51 for more information on choosing a language.
Once a language has been selected, touch I AGREE
to plan a route. The map will appear showing your
current vehicle position.
4-39
Setting the Search Area
To determine or change the system’s search area,
do the following:
2. Touch the Enter Destination screen button.
3. Touch Change under
the Search Area
heading. The system
will display a map
with each region
represented.
4. Select the desired region by touching the

appropriate screen button to the left of the
U.S. map. The name of the states or the country
included in the selected region will be displayed at
the bottom of the screen and the region will be
highlighted.
5. Touch Enter to set the region as the search area.
4-40
Map Adjustments Scrolling the Map
The system allows you to adjust the scale of view on Touch anywhere on the
the map. The map will scroll automatically based on the map screen twice to
direction you are traveling. display the scroll symbol.
Map Scales
To view a larger or smaller
scale of the map, touch
the map scale arrows.
Place your finger on the map screen in any direction
outside of the scroll symbol to scroll in that direction.
The map will continue to scroll until you remove
your finger.
If your vehicle is in PARK (P), the system will initially
scroll at a slower rate. The rate will increase if you
continue to touch the map screen.
If your vehicle is in motion, there is one scroll speed
and a limited distance to scroll. You must keep touching
the map screen to scroll a longer distance.
If your vehicle icon becomes lost while scrolling, press
the MAP key to show the vehicle’s current location.
You may also adjust the scale of the map by touching You may also use the scroll feature to set a destination.
the scale on the bar. The scale of a map can range from See “Set by Map” under Enter Destination on page 4-27.
1/32 of a mile (0.05 km) to 128 miles (256 km).
4-41
Symbols You will see this type
of symbol on the map
The following symbols are the most common that when a waypoint has
appear on a map screen. been planned.
Your vehicle is shown as

this symbol. It indicates
the current position
and heading direction of
your vehicle on the map. The waypoint symbol will be numbered from 1 through 5
depending on how many waypoints have been set.
See Edit Waypoint on page 4-23 for more information
on adding waypoints.
This symbol indicates the

This symbol will appear on
distance to your final
the map to show your
destination.
destination after a route
has been planned.
See Enter Destination on page 4-27 for more information

on planning a route.
4-42
This symbol indicates the This symbol indicates the
distance and estimated map with North up.
travel time to your
final destination.
The Estimated Travel
Time feature must be on
for estimated travel time
to be displayed.
While in North up mode, North will always be at the top
of the map screen regardless of which direction the
vehicle is traveling.
This symbol indicates This symbol indicates the

the distance to your map with the vehicle travel
final destination in a direction up, or Heading up.
straight line.
The shaded triangle indicates North. While in Heading

up mode, the direction your vehicle is traveling will
always be at the top of the map screen.
Touch either the North Up heading symbol or the
This symbol will appear before route guidance begins or if
vehicle Heading Up symbol to alternate between
you are on a road where route guidance is not available.
settings.
4-43
This symbol will appear This symbol indicates the
when the navigation position of the next turn
system is unable to instruction.
receive the GPS signal.
See Global Positioning System (GPS) on page 4-48 for While on a planned route,
more information. touch this symbol to
display the DEST MAP,
When a point of interest
WHOLE, and TURN LIST
(POI) or street address
options.
name is too long to
be displayed, an arrow
will appear.
Touch the right or left arrow to scroll through the

entire name.
4-44
With these options, you can do the following:
Whole: This option allows you to view the entire

Dest (Destination) Map: This option allows you to view planned route. The distance to destination will be
displayed on the map screen. Touch Return when
the final destination location. The destination’s name
finished.
or address will be displayed on the map screen. Touch
Return when finished.
4-45
The turn list will read from bottom to top. The bottom
street name is the street you are currently on. The
system automatically updates this screen as you make
each turn. You may also touch the scroll up and
down arrows providing scroll is available. Touching the
down arrow will bring you to your current location.
Touching the up arrow will give you upcoming streets.
At times, there may not be names available for entrance
or exit ramps.
To avoid a turn, touch AVOID next to the turn you want
to avoid. You can use REDUCE or ENLARGE to edit
the avoided point. Touch Reroute or press the MAP key
to calculate your new route.
Touch Return to view your current position and to turn
the turn list screen off.
Turn List: This option allows you to view a step-by-step
listing of upcoming street names, the distance that Touch REROUTE or press the MAP key to calculate a
you will travel on the road, and turns you will need to new route.
make during your planned route.
Auto Reroute
After touching Turn List, the system may take some
time to create the list. The length of time will vary When your destination is set and you travel off of the
depending on the length of your route and the planning planned route, the system will automatically begin
methods you have selected. to reroute you. You will see the new route highlighted
on the screen.
4-46
Traveling Across Regions If you are traveling in or to Canada and you cross the
regional border, the only map scale views available
If you plan to drive across several states, you may have are 4 mi, 8 mi, 31 mi, and 128 mi (8 km, 16 km, 64 km
to change the selected region to represent the area and 256 km). Change the selected search area region
you are traveling to. when you get closer to the area you are traveling to.
There are two ways you can plan a destination when See “Setting the Search Area” under Maps on page 4-38
traveling across regions. for more information.
The following method is suggested and provides the
most route guidance and map display functions: Keyless Access System
1. Change the selected search area region when When the engine is started, Driver 1 or Driver 2 will
you get closer to the area you are traveling to. display on the screen. A message will not appear on the
See “Setting the Search Area” under Maps screen if the driver is unknown. The number on the
on page 4-38. back of the transmitter corresponds to driver 1 or
driver 2. The navigation system can store memory points
2. Enter your destination and route settings. See Enter
for drivers 1 and 2 individually. See Keyless Access
Destination on page 4-27 for more information.
System on page 2-4 for more information.
If you do not want to use the first method, keep your
currently selected search area region and enter
your destination. This method allows you only to select
OnStar® System
a destination from the easy planning route method When using the OnStar® system, the audio system will
or from the All Points of Interest (POI) categories with be muted and the navigation voice prompts will be
the “All Search Areas” comment for US Only. disabled during the call. The volume of the OnStar® call
For example, Tourist is a category that features this can be adjusted by using the steering wheel volume
comment. See Enter Destination on page 4-27 for more controls. See OnStar® System on page 2-37 for
information. more information.
4-47
Global Positioning System (GPS) This system may not be available/or interferences may
occur if any of the following are true:
The navigation system determines the position of your • Signal are obstructed by tall buildings, large trucks,
vehicle by using satellite signals, various vehicle signals, or a tunnels.
and map data.
• Satellites are being repaired or improved.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) locates the
current position of your vehicle using signals sent by the • Objects are located on the rear shelf.
United States Department of Defense GPS satellites. • After-market glass tinting has been applied to the
While your vehicle is receiving signals from these
vehicle’s windows.
satellites, the GPS symbol will not appear on the map
screen. See Symbols on page 4-42 for more information Notice: Do not apply after-market glass tinting to
on the GPS symbol. the vehicle’s windows. Glass tinting will interfere
However, at times, other interferences such as the with the system’s ability to receive GPS signals and
satellite condition, road configuration, the condition of cause the system to malfunction. You might have
the vehicle, and/or other circumstances can interfere to replace the window to correct the problem.
with the system’s ability to determine the accurate This would not be covered by your warranty.
position of the vehicle. This is when the GPS symbol If you are experiencing a problem, see Vehicle
will appear on the map screen. Positioning on page 4-49 or Problems with Route
Guidance on page 4-50 for more information.
4-48
Vehicle Positioning • The vehicle is repeating a change of direction by
going forward and backward, or turning on a turn
At times, the position of the vehicle on the map may be table in a parking lot.
inaccurate due to one or more of the following reasons:
• The vehicle is entering and/or exiting a parking lot
• The road system has changed. or garage with a roof.
• The vehicle is traveling on slippery road surfaces • The vehicle has a roof carrier, ski, or bike rack
such as sand, gravel, and/or snow. installed on it.
• The vehicle is being driven on winding roads. • The vehicle has tire chains on it.
• The vehicle is being driven on a long straight road. • The tires have been replaced.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall building or a • The tire pressure is incorrect.
large vehicle.
• The tires are worn.
• The surface streets run parallel to a freeway.
• The battery is disconnected.
• The vehicle has just been transferred by a vehicle
carrier or a ferry. • The vehicle is driven in heavy traffic where driving
is at low speeds and the vehicle is stopped and
• The current position calibration is set incorrectly. started repeatedly.
• The vehicle is being driven at high speeds.
4-49
Problems with Route Guidance If the System Needs Service
Inappropriate route guidance may occur under any of If you are still experiencing difficulty with the navigation
the following conditions: system after reading this information, see your GM
• You have not turned onto the road indicated by the dealer for assistance.
system.
• Route guidance is not available for the next turn. Ordering Map DVDs
• The route is not changed during automatic rerouting. The map DVD in your vehicle is the most up-to-date
information available when your vehicle was purchased.
• Plural names of places are displayed. The map DVD is updated periodically, provided that
• You are driving at high speeds, which may cause the map information has changed. To order a new map
the automatic rerouting to operate more slowly. DVD, contact your dealer.
• The route prohibits the entry of a vehicle due to a
regulation by time or season or any other regulation Database Coverage Explanations
which may be given.
Coverage areas vary with respect to the level of map
• A route cannot be found. detail available for any given area. Some areas will
• A road is new, was recently changed or is not listed feature greater levels of detail than others. If this
happens, it does not mean there is a problem with the
on the DVD. The route to the destination may not
system. As the map DVD is updated, more detail
be shown. See Ordering Map DVDs on page 4-50.
may become available for areas which previously had
limited detail. See Ordering Map DVDs on page 4-50.
4-50
Navigation Audio System Main Audio Menu
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
e/ z (Audio/Adjust): Press this key to view the
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be main audio screen.
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more
information.
The audio system is operated using navigation system
menus. The audio menus are explained in this section.
4-51
With this feature on, you can recall your preset radio
stations from the map screen. You cannot store preset
stations from the map screen. You must do this from
the audio screen. See “Preset Station Menu” later in this
section for more information on storing presets.
Automatic Volume Control (AVC): To use AVC, touch
the ON button. AVC automatically adjusts the volume
level of the audio so that it always sounds the same to
you. This feature is most effective at lower volume
settings where background noise may be louder than
the audio. At high volume settings there may be little or
no change in the audio level. In some cases where
the noise level changes quickly, you may hear the audio
level changing. This is normal.
Preset Selection: Here you can program the audio 8 (Clock): Touch this screen button to get to the
system’s presets to recall your home settings by CLOCK ADJUST menu. See “Clock Adjust Menu” later
touching HOME. You can also recall the presets you in this section for more information.
use when traveling to another area by touching AWAY.
SCREEN ADJUST: To adjust the brightness or contrast
See “Preset Station Menu” later in this section for
of the screen, touch SCREEN ADJUST to display the
more information on how to store preset stations.
screen adjust menu. See “Screen Adjust Menu” later in
The Home and Away feature is not available for the this section for more information.
XM™ Satellite Radio source, if equipped.
SOUND: Touch this screen button to access the Sound
Display Presets on the Map: With this feature on, menu. See “Sound Menu” later in this section for
your audio system presets for the current audio source more information.
will be displayed on the left of the map screen.
Touch ON to turn this feature on. You may also choose DSP (Digital Signal Processing): Touch this screen
to turn this feature off. button to access the DSP menu. See “Adjusting
the Speakers” later in this section for more information.
4-52
Clock Adjust Menu GPS TIME: The current GPS time will be displayed to
the right of this screen button. Touch GPS TIME to
set the navigation system time to match current GPS
time. If the seconds for the present minute are greater
than thirty when GPS TIME is selected, the clock
will round up to the next minute.
Daylight Saving Time: Touch this screen button to
increase the time setting by one hour. Then touch
GPS TIME to save the new setting. If the screen button
is light blue, the daylight savings time feature is on.
If the button is dark blue, the daylight savings time
feature is off.
TIME ZONE: The selected time zone will appear to the
right of this screen button. Touch this screen button
to toggle between time zones and select the desired
The following options are available from this menu: one. The time of the selected zone will be displayed to
the right of the GPS TIME screen button. To set the
HOUR/MIN.: Touch the up or down arrows to increase clock to the new setting, touch GPS TIME.
or decrease the hour or minutes. If you touch and
hold one of the arrows, the numbers will advance If the system is not receiving GPS information, you can
quickly. still set the time manually as described above but
the GPS time and Daylight Saving Time features will not
12H/24H: Touch 12H to set the clock in standard time be available.
or 24H to set the clock in military time.
Touch Return to go back to the previous menu.
4-53
Screen Adjust Menu !(Brightness): Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs
to adjust the brightness of the screen.
You will see the screen change. Touch SET to confirm
the setting.
AUTO: This setting automatically adjusts the contrast
and brightness of the screen depending on exterior
lighting conditions.
DAY: This setting leaves the screen in day mode.
Day mode is best suited for daylight conditions.
NIGHT: This setting leaves the screen in night mode.
Night mode is best suited for nighttime conditions.
SCREEN OFF: Touch SCREEN OFF to turn off the
screen. Press any hard key to turn the screen back on.
The following options are available from this menu:
SET: Touch SET to save your choices and exit the
K (Contrast): Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs CLOCK ADJUST menu.
to adjust the contrast of the screen.
You will see the screen change. Touch SET to confirm
the setting.
4-54
Language Finding a Station
Your vehicle has been set for the English language.
If you wish to change the language, you must do
so through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-64 for more
information.
If the language is changed from English, a majority of
the voice guidance prompts and screen text will change
to the selected language. Remember, the menu
screens will not match word-for-word as they appear in
this manual.
Playing the Radio

PWR-VOL (Power-Volume): Press this knob to
turn the audio and navigation systems on and off. FM1 audio source shown, other sources similar
Turn the knob to increase or decrease the volume to
the audio system. Press the BAND key to switch between AM, FM1, FM2,
XM1, XM2, or WX, if equipped. Touch the desired
«TUNE/SEEK ª: Press the up or down arrow to go audio source to select it.
to the next or previous station and stay there.
BAND: Press this key to switch between AM, FM1,
FM2, XM1, XM 2, or WX, if equipped. If you are on a
map screen and press this key, the screen will not
change but the audio source will.
4-55
Preset Station Menu SCAN: To scan stations, touch SCAN. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
Up to 36 stations, 6 AM, 6 FM 1, 6 FM 2, 6 XM 1, next station. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
6 XM 2, and 6 WX, if equipped, can be programmed for
home and for away. To store presets, do the following: To scan preset stations, touch and hold SCAN
for two seconds. It will only scan the audio source it is
1. Turn the audio system on. in, with the exception of FM 1 and FM 2, which will both
2. Touch AM, FM, XM, or WX, if equipped, to display be scanned if in that source. Touch SCAN again to
the desired source. The preset station menu will stop scanning.
appear.
RDS (Radio Data System): See “Radio Data System
3. Tune to the desired station by using the (RDS)” later in this section for more information.
TUNE/SEEK arrows.
4. Touch SOUND to set the bass, mid-range, treble, MSG (Message): See “Radio Data System (RDS)” later
and DSP for your preset, if desired. See “Sound in this section for more information.
Menu” later in this section for more information. AutoSet: Touch AutoSet to replace currently stored
5. Touch and hold one of the six numbered preset preset stations with the strongest stations available in
buttons for more than two seconds until you hear the immediate area. Touch AutoSet again to return
a beep. to the original preset stations.
6. Repeat the steps for each preset and source. SOUND: See “Sound Menu” following for more
information.
DSP: See “Adjusting the Speakers” later in this section
4-56
Sound Menu To adjust sound settings, do the following:
1. Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs to adjust
treble, mid-range, and bass.
2. Touch the L for left or R for right to adjust the
balance of the speakers.
3. Touch the F for front or R for rear to adjust the fade
of the speakers.
4. Touch DSP to adjust your DSP, if equipped.
See “Adjusting the Speakers” later in this section for
more information.
After adjustments are made, touch any source screen
button. This will take you back to the preset station
menu. Whenever you touch that screen button,
the previously stored information you have entered for
each preset station will be recalled.
Touch SOUND at the bottom of the main audio screen,
source menu, or DSP menu to change the tone, DSP,
if equipped, fade, and balance for all sources. The audio
system has a separate setting for these features for
each source preset. However, the audio system keeps
one fade and one balance setting for all audio sources.
4-57
To adjust the tone for each preset, do the following: Adjusting the Speakers
1. Press the BAND key.
2. Touch AM, FM1, FM2, XM1, XM2, or WX, if
equipped, to access the desired preset screen.
3. Touch SOUND.
4. Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs to adjust
treble, mid-range, and bass.
5. Touch Return to exit. This will take you to the
preset station menu.
6. Touch and hold one of the six preset screen buttons
for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you touch that preset for less than
two seconds, the station and previously stored
information you have entered for each preset station
will be recalled. DSP (Digital Signal Processing): The DSP feature is
7. Repeat the steps for additional presets. used to provide a choice of four different listening
experiences. DSP can be used while listening to the
audio system or the CD player. The audio system can
store separate DSP settings for each source and
preset station, except WX, which is always set to TALK.
4-58
To save DSP settings for your preset stations, use the Radio Data Systems (RDS)
SOUND menu or touch DSP from the preset station
menu to access the DSP menu. See “Sound Menu”
listed previously in this section for more information.
Touch DSP to change the following options:
ON/OFF: Touch ON/OFF to turn DSP on and off.
DRIVER SEAT: Touch this button to adjust the audio to
give the driver the best possible sound quality.
TALK: TALK makes spoken words sound very clear.
Touch this button when listening to non-musical material
such as news, talk shows, and sports broadcasts.
SPACIOUS: Touch this button to make the listening
space seem larger.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
SOUND: Touch SOUND to access the Sound menu. RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
See “Sound Menu” listed previously in this section that broadcast RDS information. With RDS, the radio
for more information. can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
4-59
RDS: Touch RDS to use alternate RDS functions TA (Traffic): Touch TA to receive traffic announcements.
located in the preset menu. When you touch RDS, The audio system will turn on the TA display. TA will
you will only have about five seconds to choose RDS appear on the display if the current station broadcasts
ON/OFF, TA, MSG, PTY, or SEL PTY. If you do traffic announcements. You may also receive traffic
not make a selection, the system will return to the announcements from stations in the network related to
previous menu. the current station. If the current station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the audio system will
If you are tuned to a station broadcasting RDS
seek to a station which will. When the audio system finds
information, the station’s Program Service (PS) and
a station which broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
Program Type (PTY) will replace the station’s frequency
stop. If no station is found, TA will turn off.
on the status line at the top of the display. After about
five seconds, if available, the PTY will be replaced While a traffic announcement plays, the audio system
on the display by the station’s PTY name. The PTY and uses TA volume. To increase TA volume, touch the VOL
PTY name may be the same or different. button on your steering wheel or use the VOL up or down
If the audio system is tuned to a station that is not buttons during the announcement. See “Voice Guidance
broadcasting RDS information, the station’s frequency Volume Settings” under Setup Menu on page 4-13 for
will remain on the display. While RDS is on, the more information.
audio system will search for a stronger station in the When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio
network if a station gets too weak for listening. station or a related network station, you will hear it even if
The RDS feature relies upon receiving specific the volume is muted or a CD is playing. If the audio
information from RDS stations. These features will system tunes to a related network station for a traffic
only work when RDS information is available. announcement, it will return to the original station when
the announcement is finished. If the CD player was being
used, the CD will stay in the player and resume play at
the point where it stopped.
Touch RDS followed by TA again to turn TA off.
4-60
MSG (Message): When RDS is on, if the current When the PTY display is on, press TUNE/SEEK and
station has a message, MSG will appear on the display. SCAN to find radio stations of the PTY selected. The last
Touch MSG from the preset menu to view the message. PTY selected will be used for seek and scan modes.
If the whole message does not appear on the display, If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
parts of the message will appear every three seconds FOUND will appear on the display. If both PTY and TA
until the message is completed. Once the complete are on, the audio system will search for stations with
message has been displayed, MSG will disappear from traffic announcements and the selected PTY.
the display until another new message is received.
MSG will remain available to allow you to display the PTY (Program Type) Presets: The six presets let you
entire message again. return to your favorite PTYs. These presets have
factory PTY preset stations. See “RDS Program Type
PTY: PTY allows you to seek only stations with types (PTY) Selections” later in this section. You can set up to
of programs you want to listen to. This button is used to 12 PTYs, 6 FM 1 and 6 FM2. To save a PTY preset,
turn on and off Program Type (PTY) features. do the following:
With RDS on, touch RDS, followed by PTY. The PTY 1. Touch FM1 or FM2.
display will turn on. Touch RDS followed by this 2. Touch RDS to enter the RDS menu.
button again to turn the PTY display off.
3. Touch RDS ON/OFF to turn RDS on.
Select PTY (Select Program Type): With RDS and 4. Touch PTY.
PTY on, touch RDS, then SEL PTY. The PTY menu will
appear. Use the up and down arrows to select a PTY. 5. Touch SEL PTY and select the desired PTY from
Touch your PTY selection and the system will return the list.
you to the screen with the preset stations shown. 6. Touch and hold one of the six presets for more
See Steps 1 through 7 under “Preset Station Menu” to than two seconds until you hear a beep. Whenever
store the selected PTYs. The selected PTY is then you touch that numbered preset for less than
stored on the preset. You can now touch the PTY preset two seconds, the PTY you set will return.
to recall your settings.
7. Repeat the steps for each preset.
4-61
Once you have stored a PTY for each of your preset XM™ Satellite Radio Service
stations, you can recall a PTY preset by touching
the preset station for less than two seconds. Then use
TUNE/SEEK or SCAN to locate a station for that
PTY selection.
ALERT: This type of announcement warns of national
or local emergencies. You will not be able to turn
off alert announcements. Alert announcements will come
on even if RDS mode is turned off. ALERT appears
on the display when an alert announcement plays.
The audio system uses TA volume during these
announcements. To increase volume, touch the VOL
button on your steering wheel or use the VOL up
and down buttons during the announcement. See “Voice
Guidance Volume Settings” under Setup Menu on
page 4-13 for more information. When an alert
announcement comes on the tuned radio station or a XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
related network station, you will hear it even if the the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada
volume is muted or a CD is playing. If the audio (if available). XM™ offers 100 coast-to-coast channels
system tunes to a related network station for an alert including music, news, sports, talk, and children’s
announcement, it will return to the original station when programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio and
the announcement is finished. If the CD player is text information, including song title and artist name.
playing, the player will stop for the announcement and A service fee is required in order to receive the
resume when the announcement is finished. XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
4-62
INFO (Information): Touch INFO while in XM™ mode Setting Program Type (PTY) Preset
to retrieve various pieces of information related to
the current song or channel. By touching INFO, you may Stations
retrieve four different categories of information: Artist
Name/Feature, Song/Program Title, Channel Category,
SCATT (Category): Press the arrows to select a
and other Additional Information that may be broadcast category.
on that channel. Additional Information messages Once the desired category is displayed, press
may only be available at certain times or on certain TUNE/SEEK to select the category and take you to the
programs. If an Additional Information message is being category’s first station. If you want to go to another
broadcast on the tuned channel, INFO will appear on station within that category, press TUNE/SEEK once.
the display.
Touch and hold one of the desired P1-P6 presets
Each of the four information types may have multiple to store the selected station as a preset. If PTY times
pages of text. To reach a category, touch INFO out and is no longer on the display, start again.
repeatedly until the desired type is displayed. If there
are multiple pages of text for the information selected SCAN: Use this button to scan through the channels
type, the radio will automatically display all the within a category or scan through the preset stations.
pages for that type at a rate of about one page every To scan through the channels in a category, do the
three seconds before timing out and returning to following:
the default display. You may override this feature by 1. Select a category by using the category arrows.
touching INFO to review all of the pages at your 2. Once the desired category is displayed, touch
own pace. SCAN. The radio will begin scanning within the
XL (Explicit Language Channels): XL on the radio chosen category.
display, after the channel name, indicates content with 3. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
explicit language. These channels, or any others,
can be blocked at a customer’s request, by calling To scan through your preset stations, touch and hold
1-800-852-XMXM (9696). SCAN. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
4-63
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel audio Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
(after 4 second delay) text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another
channel.
Channel Unavail Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
available Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
No Artist Info Artist Name/Feature not No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
available Your system is working properly.
No Title Info Song/Program Title not No song title information is available at this time on this
available channel. Your system is working properly.
No CAT Info Category Name not No category information is available at this time on this
available channel. Your system is working properly.
4-64
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the category you
the chosen category selected. Your system is working properly.
No Information No Text/Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time
message available on this channel. Your system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
XM Radio ID Radio ID label If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
(channel 0) alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown Radio ID not known If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
(should only be if you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
hardware failure)
Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
4-65
Six-Disc CD Changer
With the compact disc changer, you can play up to
six normal size discs continuously.
When the radio is turned on, the changer will begin
checking for discs. This will continue for up to one and
a half minutes, depending on the number of discs
loaded. You may hear noise, but this is normal.
The CD changer is initializing.
Press the CD hard key to access the six-disc CD
changer screen. You can also use the system’s DVD
player for single CD play once the map DVD is removed.
See CD/DVD Player on page 4-69 for more information.
If no CD is loaded in the CD/DVD Player and you CD Changer Screen
press the CD hard key, the message “No CD Loaded”
Once you access the CD changer screen, you can
will appear on the display.
select one of the numbered buttons to go from
one compact disc to another among those loaded in
the CD changer and use the arrows to rewind or
fast forward through the disc selected.
4-66
The following features are also available from this r (Play): Touch this button to begin playing a CD.
screen:
• LOAD RANDOM DISC: Touch this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order on the disc
• EJECT selected. Press the TUNE/SEEK hard key to randomly
• SCAN THE DISCS or SCAN THE TRACKS seek through the tracks on this disc. Touch RANDOM
DISC again to turn off random play mode.
• and RANDOM ALL or RANDOM DISC.
SCAN TRACKS: Touch this button to hear the first
The numbered buttons (1 through 6) represent the order 10 seconds of each track on the selected disc.
of the discs loaded in the changer. If there are only Touch this button again to stop scanning. The CD will
two CDs loaded, buttons 1 and 2 will only be available mute while scanning.
to choose from.
LOAD: Touch this button once each time you wish to
r (Rewind): Touch this button to rewind quickly
load a CD into the changer. It may take up to through a track selection.
10 seconds for the changer to accept the CD into the EJECT: Touch this button once to eject the chosen CD.
slot depending on the changer initializing. Repeat The chosen CD may be selected by first touching one
this procedure for loading up to six discs. Press and of the numbered buttons from 1 to 6. Repeat this
hold the LOAD button until a beep is heard to put procedure for ejecting up to six discs from the changer.
the changer in LOAD ALL mode. Once the Insert CD If you press and hold the EJECT button until a beep
message is displayed, you can load all six discs, is heard, The system will begin to eject all of the discs
one after the other. from the player. Once the CD is removed the next
will come out until they are all ejected.
4-67
j (Pause): Touch this button to pause CD play. RDS (Radio Data Systems): See “Radio Data Systems
Touch it again to resume play or touch the play button. (RDS)” listed previously for information on this button.
RANDOM ALL: Touch this button to hear the tracks SOUND: See “Sound Menu (Tone, DSP, Fade and
on all of the discs in the CD changer in random, rather Balance)” for information on this button.
than sequential, order. Press the TUNE/SEEK hard DSP (Digital Signal Processing): See “Adjusting the
key while RANDOM ALL is on to randomly seek within Speakers” listed previously for information on this button.
that disc. Touch RANDOM ALL again to turn off
random mode. CD Changer Errors
SCAN DISCS: Touch this button to hear the first CDX ERROR could be displayed for the following:
10 seconds of first track on each disc. Touch this
button again to stop scanning. The CD will mute while • The road is too rough. The disc should play when
scanning. the road is smoother.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or not loaded label
[ (Forward): Touch this button to fast forward quickly side up.
through a track selection.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
«TUNE SEEK ª: Press the up arrow on the try again.
TUNE/SEEK switch to seek to the next selection on the If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
compact disc. If playing last track of disc, pressing corrected, please contact your GM dealer. If your audio
the up arrow will seek to the first track of the next disc. system displays an error number, write it down and
Press the down arrow to seek to the previous selection provide this information to your dealer when reporting
on the compact disc. If playing the first track of disc, the error.
pressing the down arrow will seek to the last track on the
selected disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
4-68
CD/DVD Player Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
The player that is used for the navigation map DVD can automatically. This could cause damage to a CD,
also be used as a single music CD player or a video DVD or the system if it is partially loaded. Before
DVD player. shifting out of PARK (P), make sure that the DVD or
CD Player back into PARK (P) to close the faceplate.
To use the player as a single music CD player, you
must first remove the navigation map DVD. While
playing a CD in the CD/DVD Player, the navigation
system is not available. The message “The disc installed
is not a map DVD” will appear on the display if any of
the navigation hard keys are pressed.
To remove the navigation map DVD and load a music
CD, use the following steps:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Press the TILT hard key until you hear a beep.
This will open the faceplate of the system.
3. If one is loaded, the navigation map DVD will eject
from the slot.
CD Player Screen
4. Gently remove the navigation map DVD from the
slot and return it to its case. Once a music CD is loaded, the CD player menu will
5. Insert the music CD into the slot. The system will appear on the display. When using the system as
pull the CD into the player. a single CD player, the CD hard key will alternate
between the CD player and the six-disc CD changer if
6. Press and release the TILT hard key to close the CDs are loaded.
faceplate.
4-69
r (Play): Touch this button to begin playing a CD. DVD Player
RANDOM: Touch this button to hear the tracks in To use the player as a video DVD player, you must first
random, rather than sequential, order on the disc. remove the navigation map DVD or music CD. While
Touch RANDOM again to turn off random mode. playing a video DVD, the navigation system is not
available. The message “The disc installed is not a map
SCAN TRACKS: Touch this button to hear the first
DVD” will appear on the display if any of the navigation
10 seconds of each track on the disc. Touch this button
hard keys are pressed.
again to stop scanning. The CD will mute while
scanning. This feature will not operate unless the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
REPEAT TRACK: Touch this button to repeat the
selected track. To remove the navigation map DVD and load a video
DVD, use the following steps:
r (Rewind): Touch this button to rewind quickly
through a track selection. 1. With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the vehicle
running, press the TILT hard key until a beep
j (Pause): Touch this button to pause CD play. is heard. The faceplate of the system will open.
Touch it again to resume play or touch the play button. 2. If a map DVD or a music CD is loaded, the system
will automatically eject it. Gently remove it from the
[ (Forward): Touch this button to fast forward
slot and return it to its case.
quickly through a track selection.
3. Load the video DVD into the slot. The system will
«TUNE SEEK ª: Touch the up arrow on the pull the DVD into the player.
TUNE/SEEK hard key to seek to the next selection on 4. Press and release the TILT hard key to close the
the compact disc. If playing the last track of the disc, faceplate.
touching the up arrow will seek to the first track of the
disc. Touch the down arrow to seek to the previous
selection on the compact disc. If playing the first track of
the disc, touching the down arrow will seek to the last
track of the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
4-70
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) with the system’s DVD Menu Options
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a CD, To display the menu choices while a DVD is playing,
DVD or the system if it is partially loaded. Before touch anywhere on the screen and the menu will appear.
shifting out of PARK (P), make sure that the DVD or
back into PARK (P) to close the faceplate.
Once the faceplate is closed and a video DVD is
loaded, the system will automatically play the DVD.
Playing a DVD
There are three ways to play a DVD depending on
which screen you are on. They are the following:
• Once a DVD is inserted, the system will
automatically play the DVD.
• If you are on a map screen, touch the DVD source
button.
• From the audio screen, press the DVD hard key. IMAGE: Touch this button to either start playing a DVD
or to remove the DVD menu screen.
AUDIO PROGRAM: Touch this button to change the
audio language heard.
4-71
VIEWING ANGLE: Touch this button to adjust the TITLE: Touch this button to display the title of the DVD.
viewing angle of the DVD. Some DVDs allow you to Depending on the type of DVD you are using, this
change the camera angle. This may not be available on button may or may not be available.
all DVDs. Depending on the type of DVD you are
using, this button may or may not be available.
SUBTITLE: Touch this button to playback the video
with subtitles. This may not be available on all DVDs.
Depending on the type of DVD you are using, this button
may or may not be available.
SCREEN ADJUST: Touch this button to adjust the
brightness, contrast and red/green color adjustments.
CURSOR: Touch this button to access the left/right and
up/down cursors on the screen. The cursors allow you
to navigate menu options on the screen.
MENU: Touch this button to access the DVDs menu
options. Depending on the type of DVD you are using,
this button may or may not be available. Touch the If TITLE is available, this button will allow you to
button labeled one, two or blank to change the image navigate through chapters or the DVD features.
size displayed on the screen. Once the appropriate title or track has been selected,
press the Return button then the IMAGE button on
the DVD menu to view the movie in full screen.
4-72
SETTING: Touch this button to adjust the following: SEARCH: Touch this button to search to a certain
• LANGUAGE PREFERENCES scene on the DVD. Depending on the type of DVD you
are using, this button may or may not be available.
• PARENTAL LOCK
Under LANGUAGE PREFERENCES, you can select
r (Rewind): Touch this button to rewind through a
different languages for AUDIO, SUBTITLE and scene during playback.
DVD MENUS.
r (Resume): Touch this button to resume
1. To change languages, first select the option you playing a DVD.
wish to change.
2. Select a language from the list given. c (Stop): Touch this button to stop the DVD.
3. Touch RETURN to end out the menu. j (Pause): Touch this button to pause the DVD.
Your language is now saved.
Under PARENTAL LOCK, you can select SET RATING [ (Forward): Touch this button to advance rapidly
LIMIT and SET PIN. during playback.
To SET RATING, first touch the button. Then, make L (Frame Advance): Touch this button to advance
your selection. Touch RETURN to end out the menu. by chapter during playback.
Your selection is now saved.
To use PARENTAL LOCK, first touch the button. Then,
enter a four-digit numeric password. Touch RETURN
to end out the menu.
4-73
Radio Personalization with Home To select HOME and AWAY preset stations, do the
following:
and Away Feature 1. With the audio system on, touch the Audio hard key
With this feature, you can recall the latest audio system and turn the audio system off.
settings as adjusted the last time your vehicle was 2. Touch the HOME or AWAY button from the main
operated. This feature allows two different drivers to audio screen.
store and recall their own audio system settings. The next time the audio system is turned on, the
The settings recalled by the audio system are system will recall the last active preset selection.
determined by which transmitter (1 or 2) was used to
enter the vehicle. The number on the back of the When battery power is removed and later applied, you
transmitter corresponds to driver 1 or to driver 2. The will not have to reset your home audio system preset
audio system settings will automatically adjust to where stations because the audio system remembers
they were last set by the identified driver. The settings them. However, you will have to reset your away radio
can also be recalled by briefly pressing the MEMORY preset stations.
seat switches 1 or 2 located on the driver’s door.
Your audio system can store HOME and AWAY preset
stations. HOME and AWAY preset stations allow
you to use one set of preset radio settings in the area
where you live, and another set when you go out of
town. That way, you will not need to reprogram
your preset stations every time you travel.
4-74
Voice Recognition 2. Clearly state one of the commands listed on the
following pages. For example, say “FM1”.
The navigation system’s voice recognition allows for 3. The system will tell you the command being
hands-free operation of navigation and audio system implemented. For example, the system will
features. Voice recognition can be used when the say “FM1 Radio” and change the audio system to
ignition is on or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) the FM1 source.
is active.
You can end voice recognition by not speaking any
This feature only works if the map DVD is inserted and commands. After about five seconds of silence,
I AGREE has been selected. If you try to use voice the system will automatically cancel voice recognition.
recognition without the map DVD inserted, the system
will display “Please insert the navigation map DVD At times, the system may not understand a spoken
to use the voice recognition feature.” command. If this happens, try saying the command
again. If a spoken command is not available, the system
To use navigation voice recognition, do the following: will provide feedback based on availability.
1. Press the talk symbol While using voice recognition, make sure to keep
steering wheel control interior noise levels to a minimum. Otherwise, the
and release it, when system might not recognize voice commands.
you hear a beep. The system will only recognize commands spoken
The audio system, in English.
if on, will mute.
4-75
Voice Recognition Commands Radio Commands
The following list shows all of the voice commands Radio: This command will change the audio system to
available for the navigation system with a brief the next radio audio source.
description of each. To use the voice commands, refer
to the instructions listed previously. AM: This command will change the audio system to the
AM audio source.
Help Commands FM1: This command will change the audio system to
These commands are universal and will enable you to the FM1 audio source.
use the help prompts available from the system.
FM2: This command will change the audio system to
Map Help: This command will enable the system to the FM2 audio source.
provide the available commands for the map screen.
XM1: This command will change the audio system to
Destination Help: This command will enable the the XM1 audio source.
system to provide the available commands for entering
a destination. XM2: This command will change the audio system to
the XM2 audio source.
Guidance Help: This command will enable the system
to provide the available commands for the guidance CD Changer: This command will change the audio
method. system to the CD changer audio source.
Radio Help: This command will enable the system to WX, Weather Band: These commands will change the
provide the available commands for the radio. audio system to the weather band audio source.
Disc Help: This command will enable the system to Power On, Audio On: These commands will turn the
provide the available commands for the CD changer. system’s power on.
Power Off, Audio Off: These commands will turn the
system’s power off.
4-76
Seek Up: This command will cause the selected audio Position Commands
source to seek up to the next strongest signal.
Current Position, Current Location, Show Current
Seek Down: This command will cause the selected Position, Show Current Location: These commands
audio source to seek down to the next strongest signal. will cause the system to display the vehicle’s current
location on the map screen.
Stop Scan: This command will cause the audio
source to stop scanning for the next strongest signal. Map: This command will cause the system to display
the map screen.
CD Changer Commands
Map Commands
Track Up: This command will cause the CD changer to
skip up to the next track. Zoom In: This command will cause the system to zoom
in when on the map screen.
Previous Track, Track Down: This command will
cause the CD changer to go to the previous track. Zoom Out: This command will cause the system to
zoom out when on the map screen.
Screen Commands Maximum Scale: This command will cause the system
Screen Day Mode, Day Mode On: These commands to zoom out to the maximum available map scale
will adjust the system’s screen setting to the day mode. when on the map screen.
Screen Night Mode, Night Mode On: These commands Minimum Scale: This command will cause the system
will adjust the system’s screen setting to the night mode. to zoom in to the minimum available map scale when
on the map screen.
Screen Auto Mode, Auto Mode On: These commands
will adjust the system’s screen setting to auto mode. Heading Up, Change to Heading Up: These commands
will cause the system to display the Vehicle Up heading
Screen Off: This command will turn the system’s when on the map screen. The map scale should be set
screen display off. for under 2 miles (4 km).
4-77
North Up, Change to North Up: These commands will Guidance Commands
cause the system to display the North Up heading
when on the map screen if the map scale is set Repeat Guidance, Repeat Voice: These commands
to 2 miles (4 km) or less. will cause the system to repeat the last available
voice prompt guidance command if a destination has
Map Direction, Change Map Direction: These been set.
commands will cause the system to change the vehicle’s
direction from North Up to Heading Up or Heading Up Louder: This command will cause the system to
to North Up on the map screen if the map scale is set to increase the volume of the navigation voice prompts if a
2 miles (4 km) or less. destination has been set.
Mark, Mark This Point: These commands will cause Softer: This command will cause the system to
the system to mark the location as a memory point while decrease the volume of the navigation voice prompts if
on the map screen. a destination has been set.
Destination Commands Voice Guidance Off: This command will cause the
system to turn off the navigation voice prompts if
Home, Go Home: These commands will cause the a destination has been set.
system to enter the Home destination, if one is set.
Voice Guidance On: This command will cause the
Go To Starting Point, Previous Starting Point: system to turn on the navigation voice prompts if
These commands will cause the system to enter the a destination has been set.
last available starting point as a destination.
Open Guidance, Open Guidance Screen, Open
Guide, Open Guide Screen: These commands will
cause the system to open the Guidance Appearance
menu if a destination has been set.
4-78
Close Guidance, Close Guidance Screen, Close Delete Destination, Cancel Destination: These
Guide, Close Guide Screen: These commands commands will cancel a destination if one has been set.
will cause the system to close the Guidance Appearance
menu if a destination has been set. Next Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
system to display the map view of the next waypoint
Arrow Guidance, Arrow Guide, Change To Arrow location if one has been set.
Guidance, Change To Arrow Guide: These
commands will cause the system to change to Arrow First Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
Guidance screen view in the Guidance Menu if a system to display the map view of the first waypoint
destination has been set. location if one has been set.
Turn List Guidance, Turn List Guide, Change to Second Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
Turn List Guidance, Change to Turn List Guide: system to display the map view of the second waypoint
These commands will cause the system to change to location if more than one waypoint has been set.
Turn List Guidance screen view in the Guidance Menu Third Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
if a destination has been set. system to display the map view of the third waypoint
Entire Route, Entire Route Map, Route Overview: location if more than two waypoints have been set.
These commands will cause the system to display the Fourth Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
entire route if a destination has been set. system to display the map view of the fourth waypoint
Reroute: This command will cause the system to location if more than three waypoints have been set.
generate an alternate route to a set destination while on Fifth Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
a planned route. system to display the map view of the fifth waypoint
Detour, Detour Entire Route: These commands will location if more than four waypoints have been set.
cause the system to activate the detour feature Destination Map: This command will cause the system
when driving a planned route. to display the map view of the final destination location
if one has been set.
4-79
Point of Interest (POI) Commands Mexican Restaurant, Mexican Food: These
commands will cause the system to display Mexican
The following commands will cause the system to display restaurant POI icons.
icons if they are available on the map screen when the
map scale is set to a half mile (eight-tenths km) or less. Seafood Restaurant, Seafood: These commands
will cause the system to display Seafood restaurant
Restaurant, I’m Hungry: These commands will cause POI icons.
the system to display restaurant POI icons.
Other Restaurant, Other Food: These commands will
American Restaurant, American Food: These cause the system to display other types of restaurant
commands will cause the system to display American POI icons.
restaurant POI icons.
Shopping, Shopping Mall: These commands will
Chinese Restaurant, Chinese Food: These cause the system to display mall POI icons.
commands will cause the system to display Chinese
restaurant POI icons. Grocery Store: This command will cause the system
to display grocery store POI icons.
Continental Restaurant, Continental Food: These
commands will cause the system to display Continental Gas Station, Gas: These commands will cause the
restaurant POI icons. system to display gas station POI icons.
French Restaurant, French Food: These commands Parking Garage: This command will cause the system
will cause the system to display French restaurant to display parking garage POI icons.
POI icons.
Parking Lot: This command will cause the system to
Italian Restaurant, Italian Food: These commands will display parking lot POI icons.
cause the system to display Italian restaurant POI icons.
Rental Car Agency: This command will cause the
Japanese Restaurant, Japanese Food: These system to display rental car POI icons.
commands will cause the system to display Japanese
restaurant POI icons.
4-80
Automobile Club, Triple A: These commands will Winery: This command will cause the system to
cause the system to display auto club POI icons. display winery POI icons.
Auto Service And Maintenance, Auto Service, City Hall: This command will cause the system to
Maintenance: These commands will cause the system display city hall POI icons.
to display auto service POI icons.
Police Station: This command will cause the system
Hotel: This command will cause the system to display to display police station POI icons.
hotel POI icons.
Library: This command will cause the system to
Golf Course: This command will cause the system to display library POI icons.
display golf course POI icons.
Hospital: This command will cause the system to
Ski Resort, Skiing: These commands will cause the display hospital POI icons.
system to display ski resort POI icons.
Park & Recreation, Parks & Recreation: These
Amusement Park: This command will cause the commands will cause the system to display parks and
system to display amusement park POI icons. recreation POI icons.
Sport Complex, Stadium: These commands will cause Civic Center, Community Center: These commands
the system to display sports complex POI icons. will cause the system to display community center
POI icons.
Casino: This command will cause the system to display
casino POI icons. Convention Center, Exhibition Center: These
commands will cause the system to display convention
Marina: This command will cause the system to display center POI icons.
marina POI icons.
Court House: This command will cause the system to
Tourist Attraction: This command will cause the display court house POI icons.
system to display tourist attraction POI icons.
4-81
Train Station: This command will cause the system to Performing Arts: This command will cause the system
display train station POI icons. to display performing arts POI icons.
Airport: This command will cause the system to Museum: This command will cause the system to
display airport POI icons. display museum POI icons.
Bus Station: This command will cause the system to Bank: This command will cause the system to display
display bus station POI icons. bank POI icons.
Commuter Rail Station: This command will cause the School: This command will cause the system to
system to display commuter rail station POI icons. display school POI icons.
Ferry Terminal: This command will cause the system ATM: This command will cause the system to display
to display ferry terminal POI icons. ATM POI icons.
Park & Ride: This command will cause the system to Higher Education, University, College: These
display park & ride POI icons. commands will cause the system to display higher
education POI icons.
Rest Area, Rest Stop: These commands will cause
the system to display rest area POI icons. Business Facility: This command will cause the
system to display business facility POI icons.
Tourist Information: This command will cause the
system to display tourist information POI icons. City Center: This command will cause the system to
display city center POI icons.
Historical Monument: This command will cause the
system to display historical monument POI icons. POI Off: This command will cause the system to turn
off POIs so they do not appear on the map screen.
4-82
Section 5 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........5-2 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................5-20
Defensive Driving ...........................................5-2 City Driving ..................................................5-22
Drunken Driving .............................................5-3 Freeway Driving ...........................................5-23
Control of a Vehicle ........................................5-6 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................5-24
Braking .........................................................5-6 Highway Hypnosis ........................................5-25
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................5-7 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................5-26
Braking in Emergencies ...................................5-9 Winter Driving ..............................................5-27
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................5-9 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Magnetic Ride Control ...................................5-11 Ice or Snow ..............................................5-32
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ...................................5-11 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................5-32
StabiliTrak® System ......................................5-11 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................5-33
Steering ......................................................5-13 Towing ..........................................................5-37
Off-Road Recovery .......................................5-15 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................5-37
Passing .......................................................5-16 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................5-37
Loss of Control .............................................5-17 Towing a Trailer ...........................................5-37
Driving at Night ............................................5-18
5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle {CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
Defensive Driving anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: expressways, it means “Always expect the
Drive defensively. unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
Please start with a very important safety device in your drivers are going to be careless and make
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
Everyone on page 1-5. be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
5-2
Drunken Driving Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims There are good medical, psychological, and
every year. developmental reasons for these laws.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
a vehicle: safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
• Judgment then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
• Muscular Coordination than many might think. Although it depends on
• Vision each person and situation, here is some general
information on the problem.
• Attentiveness
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
Police records show that almost half of all motor who is drinking depends upon four things:
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was • The amount of alcohol consumed
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than • The drinker’s body weight
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than • The amount of food that is consumed before and
300,000 people injured. during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
5-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) if the same person drank three double martinis
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses A person who consumes food just before or during
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka. There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water,
this means that a woman generally will reach a higher
BAC level than a man of her same body weight will
when each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example,
it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the
United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
5-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of There is something else about drinking and driving that
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills many people do not know. Medical research shows
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of disabled is higher than if the person had not been
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a drinking.
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! {CAUTION:
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
and judgment can be affected by even a
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC small amount of alcohol. You can have a
might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid serious — or even fatal — collision if you
the collision. drive after drinking. Please do not drink and
drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with
a group, designate a driver who will not drink.
5-5
Control of a Vehicle Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-54.
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
Braking action involves perception time and
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have reaction time.
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road. First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, foot and do it. That is reaction time.
it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control System second. But that is only an average. It might be less
(TCS) on page 5-9 and StabiliTrak® System on with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
page 5-11. more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
performance. See Accessories and Modifications second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
on page 6-3. 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
5-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to electronic braking system that will help prevent a
cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear braking skid.
out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
following distances, you will eliminate a lot of
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
is going on, and you may even notice that your brake
longer brake life.
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do, If there is a problem with
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine the anti-lock brake system,
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. this warning light will
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power stay on. See Anti-Lock
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and Brake System Warning
the brake pedal will be harder to push. Light on page 3-55.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.
5-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you steer around
the obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
will separately work the brakes at each wheel. on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
5-8
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you Traction Control System (TCS)
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
though you have anti-lock brakes. beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the rear brakes and reduces engine
Using Anti-Lock power to limit wheel spin.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal The TRAC SYSTEM ACTIVE message will display on
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the traction
a motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedal control system is limiting wheel spin. See DIC Warnings
move a little during a stop, but this is normal. and Messages on page 3-67. You may feel or hear
the system working, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the control will automatically disengage. When road
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
more than even the very best braking. reengage the cruise control. See Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 3-15.
5-9
This warning light will To turn the system off,
come on to let you know if press the front part of the
there is a problem with traction control button
your traction control located on the center
system. console.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on The TRACTION SYSTEM-OFF message will display on
page 3-56. When this warning light is on, the system will the DIC and the traction control system warning light
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. will come on. If the system is limiting wheel spin when
you press the button, the TRACTION SYSTEM-OFF
The traction control system automatically comes on
message will display – but the system will not turn
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
off right away. It will wait until there is no longer
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
a current need to limit wheel spin.
leave the system on. But you can turn the traction
control system off if you ever need to. You should turn You can turn the system back on at any time by
the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, pressing the button again. The TRACTION SYSTEM-ON
mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required. message should display briefly on the Driver Information
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5-32 Center.
and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
on page 5-32 for more information. performance. See Accessories and Modifications
5-10
Magnetic Ride Control StabiliTrak® System
Magnetic Ride Control automatically adjusts the ride of The StabiliTrak® System is a computer controlled
your vehicle. Automatic ride control is achieved system that helps the driver maintain directional control
through a computer used to control and monitor the of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is
suspension system. The controller receives input from accomplished by selectively applying any one of the
various sensors to determine the proper system vehicle’s brakes.
response. If the controller detects a problem within When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
the system, the DIC will display a SERVICE RIDE
away (6 mph (10 km/h)), especially during cold weather,
CONTROL message. See DIC Warnings and Messages
the message STABILITRAK WARMING may be
on page 3-67 for more information. See your dealer displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), the
for service.
instrument cluster light will be on, and a chime will
sound. This is normal. You can acknowledge this
Limited-Slip Rear Axle message by pressing the RESET button. The
StabiliTrak® System performance is affected until the
Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional message, STABILITRAK READY, is displayed in
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works the DIC. This can take up to 15 minutes.
like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of
the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, The WAIT FOR STABILITRAK message may be
this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move displayed in the DIC after exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h)
the vehicle. for 10 seconds if the steering is not centered.
The system is off until the STABILITRAK ACTIVE
message is displayed.
5-11
The STABILITRAK ACTIVE message will come on The system comes on automatically whenever you start
when the system is operating. See DIC Warnings your vehicle. To help maintain directional control of
and Messages on page 3-67 for more information. the vehicle, you should always leave the system on.
You may also feel or hear the system working. You can turn the system off if you ever need to. If you
This is normal. turn the STABILITRAK® System off, the Traction
Control System will also be turned off. Adjust your
The instrument cluster light driving accordingly.
will come on and a chime
will sound to let you To turn the system off,
know if there is a problem press and hold the front
with the system. part of the traction
control button on the
console for five seconds
with the vehicle stopped.
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will also be
displayed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-67 for more information. You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing
When this light and the SERVICE STABILITRAK the button. The DIC will display the appropriate message
message are on, the system is not operational. when you push the button, either TRAC/STABILITRAK
Adjust your driving accordingly. ON or TRAC/STABILITRAK OFF.
5-12
Steering The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
Power Steering you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you lose power steering assist because the engine If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but you will understand this.
it will take much more effort.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
Steering in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Your vehicle is equipped with a steering system that Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when parking, systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds. their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
Steering Tips sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. System (TCS) on page 5-9.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the news happen on curves. Here is why: the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to want it to go, and slow down.
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
5-13
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should Steering in Emergencies
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under There are times when steering can be more effective
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower. than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
wheels are straight ahead. avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to That is the time for evasive action — steering around
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then the problem.
accelerate gently into the straightaway. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s these. First apply your brakes.
performance. See Accessories and Modifications See Braking on page 5-6. It is better to remove as much
on page 6-3. speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending on the
space available.
5-14
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a

quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
avoided the object. accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
The fact that such emergency situations are always steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
at all times and wear safety belts properly. one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel
to go straight down the roadway.
5-15
Passing • Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a following too closely reduces your area of vision,
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then you will not have adequate space if the vehicle
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane reasonable distance.
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the • When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in not get too close. Time your move so you will be
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision. a running start that more than makes up for the
So here are some tips for passing: distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
to crossroads for situations that might affect your and wait for another opportunity.
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a • If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
better time. wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a check the blind spot.
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it is all right to pass,
providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
5-16
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, Loss of Control
and start your left lane change signal before moving
out of the right lane to pass. When you are far Let us review what driving experts say about what
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in happens when the three control systems — brakes,
your inside mirror, activate your right lane change steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
signal and move back into the right lane. Remember where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
that your passenger side outside mirror is convex. has asked.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
away from you than it really is. and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on danger.
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle. Skidding
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
be slowing down or starting to turn. care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
ease a little to the right. three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
5-17
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only Driving at Night
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want problems, or by fatigue.
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, Here are some tips on night driving.
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
• Drive defensively.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
• Do not drink and drive.
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you • Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to from headlamps behind you.
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
vehicle control more limited. slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, • Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires road ahead.
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery • In remote areas, watch for animals.
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow • If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and and rest.
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
5-18
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
But as we get older these differences increase. clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass
makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
repeatedly.
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
make a lot of things invisible. lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
are not even aware of it.
When you are faced with severe glare, as from a
driver who does not lower the high beams, or a
vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little.
Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
5-19
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as
on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much
tread left, you will get even less traction. It is always
wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to
fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet
suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on
dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic
signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and
even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when
strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
5-20
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION: Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
work as well in a quick stop and may cause hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle. Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
After driving through a large puddle of water one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly standing on the road. If you can see reflections
until your brakes work normally. from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
hit them.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
5-21
Driving Through Flowing Water City Driving
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips

• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
room ahead, and be prepared to have your what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
view restricted by road spray. traffic signals.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6-47.
5-22
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 5-23.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,

expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
5-23
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Expect to move slightly slower at night.
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving. proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. Drive on to the next exit.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin according to your speedometer, not to your sense
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, than you actually are.
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow. Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower. must start when you are not fresh — such as after
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
your turn signal. and shoes you can easily drive in.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
your blind spot. service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you in GM dealerships all across North America. They will
allow a reasonable following distance. be ready and willing to help if you need it.
5-24
Here are some things you can check before a trip: Highway Hypnosis
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside? Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked There is something about an easy stretch of road with
all levels? the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for can leave the road in less than a second, and you could
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the crash and be injured.
recommended pressure? What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook aware that it can happen.
along your route? Should you delay your trip a Then here are some tips:
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
5-25
Hill and Mountain Roads
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from get so hot that they would not work well.
driving in flat or rolling terrain. You would then have poor braking or even none
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are going down a hill. You could crash. Always have
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your engine running and your vehicle in gear
your trips safer and more enjoyable. when you go downhill.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
5-26
• Know how to go down hills. The most important thing Winter Driving
to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action. Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 6-47.
5-27
Driving On Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a

supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
5-28
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews on page 5-7.
can get there. • Allow greater following distance on any
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing, slippery road.
or loose snow — drive with caution.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear
has the Traction Control System (TCS), you will want in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach,
to slow down and adjust your driving to the road such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want to or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a
turn the TCS off, such as when driving through curve or an overpass may remain icy when the
deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control System ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it.
(TCS) on page 5-9. The StabiliTrak® System may Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice,
also activate. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5-11. and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
5-29
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
5-30
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
{CAUTION: faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
heater run for a while.
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
base of your vehicle, especially any that is again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
again from time to time to be sure snow does To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and
not collect there. do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
Open a window just a little on the side of the so until help comes.
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
5-31
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
Mud, Ice or Snow wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin For more information about using tire chains on your
your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking can vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 6-64.
help you get out when you are stuck, but you must
use caution. Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
{CAUTION: clear the area around your front wheels. You should turn
your traction control system off. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 5-9. Then shift back and
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
explode, and you or others could be injured. spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
And, the transmission or other parts of the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
engine compartment fire or other damage. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph may free your vehicle. If that does not get you out
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer. after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you
do need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
on page 5-37.
5-32
Loading Your Vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Label Example
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
your vehicle handles. These could cause you attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your vehicle.
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading With the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached
below the door latch. This label shows the number of
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 6-47
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-54.
5-33
There is also important loading information on the 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
vehicle Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
See “Certification Label” later in this section. your vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to
tow a trailer.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is Example 1
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Item Description Total
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and Vehicle Capacity Weight
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight A for Example 1 = 400 lbs (181 kg)
may not safely exceed the available cargo Subtract Occupant
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. B Weight @ 150 lbs 150 lbs (68 kg)
(68 kg) x 1 =
Available Occupant and
C Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)
5-34
Example 2 Example 3
Item Description Total Item Description Total
A Vehicle Capacity Weight 400 lbs (181 kg) A Vehicle Capacity Weight 400 lbs (181 kg)
for Example 2 = for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
B Weight @ 150 lbs 300 lbs (136 kg) B Weight @ 200 lbs 400 lbs (181 kg)
(68 kg) x 2 = (91 kg) x 2 =
C Available Cargo 100 lbs (45 kg) C Available Cargo 0 lbs (0 kg)
Weight = Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
5-35
Certification Label And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Do not carry more than 61 lbs (28 kg) in the
rear area of your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
5-36
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
Towing
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going. Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
{CAUTION: See Roadside Service on page 8-6.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike Recreational Vehicle Towing
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash. Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
• Put things in the rear area of your vehicle. behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
Try to spread the weight evenly.
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
inside the vehicle so that some of them (towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
are above the tops of the seats. two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle. Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any
of its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must
• When you carry something inside the be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in this
vehicle, secure it whenever you can. section.
Towing a Trailer
Your XLR is neither designed nor intended to tow
a trailer.
5-37
✍ NOTES
5-38
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................6-3 Overheated Engine Protection
Accessories and Modifications ..........................6-3 Operating Mode ........................................6-25
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................6-3 Cooling System ............................................6-26
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................6-4 Power Steering Fluid .....................................6-31
Adding Equipment to the Outside Windshield Washer Fluid ................................6-32
of Your Vehicle ...........................................6-4 Brakes ........................................................6-33
Fuel ................................................................6-5 Battery ........................................................6-36
Gasoline Octane ............................................6-5 Jump Starting ...............................................6-37
Gasoline Specifications ....................................6-5 Rear Axle .......................................................6-42
California Fuel ...............................................6-5 Headlamp Aiming ...........................................6-43
Additives .......................................................6-6 Headlamp Vertical Aiming ..............................6-44
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................6-6
Filling the Tank ..............................................6-7 Bulb Replacement ..........................................6-45
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................6-10 Windshield Replacement .................................6-46
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................6-10 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............6-46
Hood Release ..............................................6-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................6-12 Tires ..............................................................6-47
Engine Oil ...................................................6-13 Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................6-48
Engine Oil Life System ..................................6-16 Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................6-50
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................6-18 Run-Flat Tires ..............................................6-52
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................6-19 Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................6-54
Engine Coolant .............................................6-20 Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................6-55
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................6-23 Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................6-57
Engine Overheating .......................................6-23 When It Is Time for New Tires .......................6-58
6-1
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Buying New Tires .........................................6-58 Finish Care ..................................................6-75
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................6-60 Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................6-75
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................6-60 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ................6-76
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................6-62 Tires ...........................................................6-77
Wheel Replacement ......................................6-62 Sheet Metal Damage .....................................6-77
Tire Chains ..................................................6-64 Finish Damage .............................................6-77
Lifting Your Vehicle .......................................6-65 Underbody Maintenance ................................6-77
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................6-69 Chemical Paint Spotting .................................6-77
Appearance Care ............................................6-71 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................6-78
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................6-71 Vehicle Identification ......................................6-79
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................6-72 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................6-79
Leather .......................................................6-73 Service Parts Identification Label .....................6-79
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Electrical System ............................................6-80
Other Plastic Surfaces ................................6-73 Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................6-80
Wood Panels ...............................................6-73 Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................6-80
Speaker Covers ............................................6-74 Power Windows and Other Power Options .......6-80
Care of Safety Belts ......................................6-74 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................6-80
Weatherstrips ...............................................6-74 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................6-81
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................6-74 Underhood Fuse Block ..................................6-83
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................6-75
Capacities and Specifications ..........................6-86
6-2
Service Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
and GM-trained and supported service people. handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. control and stability control. Some of these accessories
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and
ask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning

Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
6-3
Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
{CAUTION: see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 8-14.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
damaged if you try to do service work on a do your own service work, see Servicing Your
vehicle without knowing enough about it. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-44.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
experience, the proper replacement parts, the mileage and the date of any service work you
and tools before you attempt any vehicle perform. See Maintenance Record on page 7-14.
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and Adding Equipment to the Outside
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you of Your Vehicle
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt. Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
6-4
Fuel Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
proper maintenance of your vehicle. specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
Gasoline Octane methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane General Motors recommends against the use of
rating of 91 or higher. You may also use regular gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 6-6
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but for additional information.
your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly reduced, and
you may notice a slight audible knocking noise, California Fuel
commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane is
less than 87, you may notice a heavy knocking If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. meet California specifications. See the underhood
Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If you are emission control label. If this fuel is not available
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear in states adopting California emissions standards,
heavy knocking, your engine needs service. your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-58. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
6-5
Additives Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
are now required to contain additives that will help (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
allowing your emission control system to work recommends against the use of such gasolines.
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain and the performance of the emission control system
only the minimum amount of additive required to may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, GM dealer for service.
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised
as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your GM dealer Fuels in Foreign Countries
has additives that will help correct and prevent most If you plan on driving in another country outside the
deposit-related problems. United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
your area. General Motors recommends that you use Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications be covered by your warranty.
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used contact a major oil company that does business in the
in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels. country where you will be driving.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
6-6
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
in some places. Keep children away from the door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
6-7
The fuel door release To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
button is located on the left The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
side of the instrument too soon, it will spring back to the right.
panel. The button While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
only works when the hook on the fuel door.
vehicle is in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) and the
valet lockout button
is in OFF. {CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
An alternate fuel door This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
release is located inside
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the trunk behind a panel on
the driver’s side of the the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
vehicle. Pull the handle to to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
release the fuel door.
6-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel {CAUTION:
from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 6-74. If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. shutting off the pump or by notifying the
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-58. Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
The CHECK GAS CAP message in the Driver the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
Information Center (DIC) will be displayed if the If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
fuel cap is not properly installed. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-58.
6-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
{CAUTION:
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. An electric fan under the hood can start up
You can be badly burned and your vehicle and injure you even when the engine is not
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
you and others: from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or {CAUTION:
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
inside of the fill opening before operating and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
until the filling is complete. other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline. others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-10
Hood Release
To lift the hood, use the following steps:
1. Pull the lever with this
symbol on it. It is
located on the lower
left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the

secondary hood release lever. The lever is
located under the hood near the center of the
vehicle. Move the release lever to the right and
raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
6-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, here is what you will see:
6-12
A. Battery. See Battery on page 6-36. Engine Oil
B. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-47. If the LOW OIL LEVEL or LOW OIL PRESSURE
message on the Driver Information Center appears
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
(DIC), it means you need to check your engine oil level
on page 6-83.
right away. For more information, see LOW OIL LEVEL
D. Power Steering Fluid. See Power Steering Fluid on and LOW OIL PRESSURE under DIC Warnings and
page 6-31. Messages on page 3-67.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-18. an added reminder.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-13. Checking Engine Oil
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
under Engine Oil on page 6-13. get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
under Brakes on page 6-33. The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for
See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on the location of the engine oil dipstick.
page 6-23. 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
on page 6-32.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
6-13
When to Add Engine Oil See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the

dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This section explains Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
see Capacities and Specifications on page 6-86. way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
6-14
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these

requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Look for two things:

• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting You should look for this on the oil container, and use
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
standard may be identified as synthetic. However, Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. the front of the oil container.
You should look for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.
6-15
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for oil change will be indicated can vary considerably.
your vehicle. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset
the system every time the oil is changed.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M When the system has calculated that oil life has been
may not be available. You can add substitute oil diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all A CHANGE OIL NOW message in the DIC will come on.
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67. Change
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change. your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the
Engine Oil Additives best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that
an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer
GM4718M are all you will need for good performance
has GM-trained service people who will perform this work
and engine protection.
using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
Engine Oil Life System proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
When to Change Engine Oil change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based whenever the oil is changed.
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and
not on mileage.
6-16
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life What to Do with Used Oil
System and the Oil Life Indicator Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
CHANGE OIL NOW message in the DIC being manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of
turned on, reset the system. oil products.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE OIL NOW Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
message and the oil life indicator must be reset. change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
To reset the message use the following procedure: filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
1. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
to show OIL LIFE. taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
2. Once the XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
highlighted, press and hold the RESET button until dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
the percentage shows 100%. for help.
If the percentage does not return to 100% or if the
CHANGE OIL NOW message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
6-17
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the filters, do the following:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12

for the location of the engine air cleaner/filters.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filters
Inspect the air cleaner/filters at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace them at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-4 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filters at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine

Air Cleaner/Filters
1. Flip the clasps on the top of the engine air
To inspect the air cleaner/filters, remove the filters from cleaner/filter cover forward to unlatch the cover.
the vehicle and lightly shake the filters to release
2. Lift the front of the cover at an angle and remove.
loose dust and dirt. If the filters remain caked with dirt,
This is necessary due to the four tabs located on
new filters are required.
the rear of the cover.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element and
any loose debris that may be found in the air
cleaner base.
4. Inspect or replace the filter.
5. Repeat the procedure for the second air cleaner/filter.
6-18
Follow these steps to reinstall the covers to the engine Automatic Transmission Fluid
air cleaner/filter housings:
1. Align the four tabs located on the back of the cover How to Check Automatic
with the three slots on the back of the housing. Transmission Fluid
2. Push the cover slightly down and towards the
engine to engage the tabs in the slots and align the It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
two wing screws. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership
3. Engage and tighten the two clasps on the top of the service department and have it repaired as soon as
engine air cleaner/filter cover. possible.
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
{CAUTION: the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is
difficult, you should have this done at the dealership
service department. Contact your dealer for additional
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter information or the procedure can be found in the service
off can cause you or others to be burned. manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps Publications Ordering Information on page 8-14.
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
not there and the engine backfires, you could
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be may not be covered by your warranty. Always
careful working on the engine with the air use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
cleaner/filter off. Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can Additional Required Services on page 7-6, and be sure
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
into your engine, which will damage it. Always have Lubricants on page 7-11.
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
6-19
Engine Coolant Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles service after each 25,000 miles (41 500 km) or
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant. would not be covered by your warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
The following explains your cooling system and how to
in your vehicle.
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 6-23. What to Use
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will: one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
• Giving freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
not need to add anything else.
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
6-20
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
{CAUTION: The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
Adding only plain water to your cooling and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or other parts.
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your have your dealer check your cooling system.
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
but you would not get the overheat warning. of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
Your engine could catch fire and you or others the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Lubricants on page 7-11 for more information.
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
6-21
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your

engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
The engine coolant surge tank is located toward the FULL COLD mark, located on the side of the surge tank
rear of the engine compartment on the driver’s side of that faces the front.
the vehicle. For more information on location, see
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12. If the LOW COOLANT message on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on and stays on,
it means you are low on engine coolant. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for more
information.
6-22
Adding Coolant Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL® Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the coolant loss and possible engine damage may
engine is cool. occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
{CAUTION: installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for more
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot information on location.
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot Engine Overheating
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
You will find a COOLANT OVER TEMP message or an
ENGINE HOT, STOP ENGINE message displayed in
When replacing the pressure cap, press down and turn the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
it clockwise until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure and Messages on page 3-67. You will also hear a
the cap is hand-tight and fully seated. chime.
There is also an engine coolant temperature gage on
the instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-57.
6-23
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
{CAUTION: An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,
can indicate a serious problem.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
you badly, even if you just open the hood. coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get get a little too hot when you:
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools • Climb a long hill on a hot day.
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or • Stop after high-speed driving.
coolant before you open the hood. • Idle for long periods in traffic.
If you keep driving when your engine is • Tow a trailer.
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the try this for a minute or so:
vehicle until the engine is cool. 1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
Mode on page 6-25 for information on driving
engine idle.
to a safe place in an emergency.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting
and fan speed and open the windows as necessary.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 6-25 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
6-24
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can Overheated Engine Protection
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, Operating Mode
you can drive normally.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your a safe place in an emergency situation. If an overheated
vehicle right away. engine condition exists and the DIC message ENGINE
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for HOT, STOP ENGINE is displayed, an overheat
three minutes while you are parked. If you still have protection mode which alternates firing groups of
the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” performance. Driving extended miles (km) in the
later in this section. overheat protection mode should be avoided.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
help right away. protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 6-13.
6-25
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what {CAUTION:
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,

do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
A low coolant level should be indicated by a LOW
COOLANT message on the Driver Information Center
(DIC). If it is, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or
in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump, or somewhere else in the cooling system.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
6-26
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
{CAUTION: See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 6-25 for information on driving to a safe
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine place in an emergency.
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
If you do, you can be burned. cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
run the engine, it could lose all coolant.
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
That could cause an engine fire, and you could would not be covered by your warranty.
be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
the vehicle. in your vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check

to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, your vehicle needs service.
6-27
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank CAUTION: (Continued)
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark
is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant
on the front of the coolant surge tank, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling have to turn the pressure cap.
system, including the coolant surge tank pressure
cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant {CAUTION:
as follows:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
{CAUTION: some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
system can blow out and burn you badly. proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
They are under pressure, and if you turn the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
coolant surge tank pressure cap — even a but you would not get the overheat warning.
little — they can come out at high speed. Your engine could catch fire and you or others
CAUTION: (Continued) could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
6-28
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure

cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it.
6-29
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
until the level inside the surge tank stabilizes at the the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
FULL COLD mark on the front of the surge tank. radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level stabilizes at the FULL COLD mark
on the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
6-30
If the LOW COOLANT message does not appear on the How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Driver Information Center (DIC) after two minutes, the
coolant is at the proper fill level. If a LOW COOLANT To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
message does appear, repeat Steps 1 through 3 1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
then reinstall the pressure cap, or see your dealer. cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
Power Steering Fluid 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
See Engine Compartment clean rag.
Overview on page 6-12 for 4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
reservoir location.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
When to Check Power Steering Fluid fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
6-31
Windshield Washer Fluid Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
What to Use follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
be operating your vehicle in an area where the Water can cause the solution to freeze and
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
sufficient protection against freezing. of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid • Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
The LOW WASHER FLUID message will be displayed full when it is very cold. This allows for
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the expansion if freezing occurs, which could
fluid is low. damage the tank if it is completely full.
Open the cap with the

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
washer symbol on it. windshield washer. It can damage your washer
Add washer fluid until the system and paint.
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 6-12 for reservoir
location.
6-32
Brakes So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add
Brake Fluid fluid when your linings are worn, then you will have
too much fluid when you get new brake linings.
Your brake master cylinder You should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,
reservoir is filled with only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
DOT-3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12 {CAUTION:
for the location of the
reservoir.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the in this section.
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak on page 7-4.
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
6-33
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap. {CAUTION:
Look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level should
be above the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it is not, have
your brake system checked to see if there is a leak. With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make may not even work at all. This could cause a
sure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake Notice:
fluid. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-11. Use new brake fluid from a sealed • Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
container only. system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area brake system can damage brake system parts so
around the cap before removing it. This will help badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
keep dirt from entering the reservoir. let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 6-74.
6-34
Brake Wear Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes. applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make your brakes.
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound axle sets.
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the Brake Pedal Travel
brake pedal firmly. See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
{CAUTION:
Brake Adjustment
The brake wear warning sound means that soon As you make brake stops, your disc brakes
your brakes will not work well. That could lead automatically adjust for wear.
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake

pads could result in costly brake repair.
6-35
Replacing Brake System Parts Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. number shown on the original battery’s label. We
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery.
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings wear For battery replacement, see your dealer or the service
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
new approved GM replacement parts. If you do not, and Owner Publications in Service Publications Ordering
your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, Information on page 8-14.
if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking chemicals known to the State of California to cause
performance you have come to expect can change in cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
many other ways if someone puts in the wrong handling.
replacement brake parts.
6-36
Vehicle Storage Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
the battery. This will help keep your battery from vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
running down.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas because:
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if • They contain acid that can burn you.
you are not careful. See Jump Starting on
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
page 6-37 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
You must close all doors and the trunk before
reconnecting the battery. After reconnecting the battery,
you must press the unlock button on the keyless
access transmitter. Failure to follow this procedure may
result in the alarm sounding. Pressing unlock on the
keyless access transmitter would stop the alarm.
6-37
Notice: If you try to start your vehicle by pushing Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
or pulling it, you could damage your vehicle. Do not on during the jump starting procedure, they could
push or pull your vehicle to start it; instead, use be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
the jump starting procedure in this manual to start by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
your vehicle when the battery has run down. other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
battery with a negative ground system. unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems And it could save the radio!
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground on page 6-12 for more information on location.
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
{CAUTION:
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic An electric fan can start up even when the
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission engine is not running and can injure you.
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
6-38
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
this, and some have been blinded. Use a parts once the engine is running.
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do 5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
not need to add water to the battery installed missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. Before you connect the cables, here are some
If it is low, add water to take care of that first. basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
If you do not, explosive gas could be present. positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
with water and get medical help immediately. will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6-39
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote the engine for a while.
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a service.
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6-40
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may do the following:
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect vehicle that had the dead battery.
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
each other or other metal. vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
6-41
Rear Axle To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on
a level surface.
When to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an filler plug hole.
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired. What to Use
How to Check Lubricant To add lubricant when the level is low, use SAE 75W-90
Synthetic Gear Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261) or
equivalent meeting GM Specification 9986115.
To completely refill after draining, add 4 ounces
(118 ml) of Limited-Slip Differential Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. 1052358) or equivalent. Then fill to the
bottom of the filler plug hole with the Synthetic Gear
Lubricant.
6-42
Headlamp Aiming Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall
or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming to the wall or other flat surface.
system equipped with horizontal aim indicators. • The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
The aim has been preset at the factory and should need attached to it.
no further adjustment. This is true even though your
horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on the • The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
“0” (zero) marks on their scales. work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp • The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers the driver’s seat.
(for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash • Tires should be properly inflated.
their high beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe
your headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend • Start the vehicle and rock it to level the suspension.
that you take your vehicle to your dealer for service.
However, it is possible for you to re-aim your headlamps
as described in the following procedure.
6-43
Headlamp aiming is done with the low-beam headlamps. Headlamp Vertical Aiming
The high-beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if
the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly. Notice: Horizontal aiming must be performed
before making any adjustments to the vertical aim.
The headlamp aiming Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an
devices are under the incorrect headlamp aim.
hood near the headlamps.
1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on each low-beam headlamp. Record this
distance.
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of
the vehicle.
If you believe your headlamps need vertical (up/down)
adjustment, follow the vertical aiming procedure.
Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx®
socket or T15 Torx screwdriver.
6-44
5. Turn the vertical
aiming screw until the
headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal
tape line. The top
edge of the cut-off
should be positioned
at the bottom edge
of the horizontal
tape line.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the opposite headlamp.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam Bulb Replacement

cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
your dealer.
damage to the headlamp.
4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
6-45
Windshield Replacement To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Place the vehicle in accessory mode and turn
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the Head-Up the wipers on. Position the wipers on the
Display (HUD) system. If you ever have to get your windshield in the mid-wipe position. Then with a
windshield replaced, be sure to get one that is designed door open, turn the vehicle off.
for HUD or your HUD image may look blurred or out
of focus.
Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-4.
It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7-13.
2. Tip the blade up and pull up on the tab to release

the wiper blade assembly.
3. To install, align the wiper blade with the loop on
the wiper blade assembly, and push up to snap it
into place.
6-46
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet could cause serious injury. Check all tires
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual. frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-54.
{CAUTION: • Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
are dangerous. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Overloading your tires can cause • Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
overheating as a result of too much If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
friction. You could have an air-out and a have been damaged, replace them.
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 5-33.
6-47
Tire Sidewall Labeling (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall. to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
The example below shows a typical passenger (p-metric) TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
tire sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6-60.
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
needed to support that load.
section for more detail.
6-48
Tire Size (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
The following illustration shows an example of a typical if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of
passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size. the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 60 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States (F) Service Description: These characters represent
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
the first character in the tire size means a passenger index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
and Rim Association. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
6-49
Tire Terminology and Definitions Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure without passengers and cargo.
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa). DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
conditioning. plant, brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
its width. Your Vehicle on page 5-33.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-33.
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-33.
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
centerline of the tread. mounted on a vehicle.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-54. trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
6-50
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air on page 6-54 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-33.
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the centerline of the tread.
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb beads are seated.
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg). Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-33. tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an surface. The amount of grip provided.
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or with the road.
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
the other sidewall of the tire. called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6-58.
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
6-51
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): Run-Flat Tires
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and Your vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. There is no
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and no place
using government testing procedures. The ratings are to store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat tires perform
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform so well without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor
Tire Quality Grading on page 6-60. (TPM) is used to alert you if a tire has lost pressure.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the side
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus of the road to change the tire. You can just keep on
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle driving. The shorter the distance you drive and the
on page 5-33. slower the speed, the greater the chance that the tire
will not have to be replaced. If you drive on a deflated
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an run-flat tire for 50 miles (80 km) or less and at speeds of
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, 55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance that
occupant weight, and cargo weight. the tire can be repaired. The tire can operate effectively
with no air pressure for up to 100 miles (160 km) at
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would then
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and have to be replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it
the original equipment tire size and recommended provides a cushion between the road and the wheel.
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information Because you will not have this cushion when driving on
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-33. a deflated tire, try to avoid potholes that could damage
your wheel and require replacement of it.
6-52
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair. The valve stems on your run-flat tires have sensors that
This damage could occur even before you have driven are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
on the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-55.
been damaged, or if you have driven any distance on a These sensors contain batteries which are designed to
run-flat tire, check with an authorized run-flat tire last for 10 years under normal driving conditions.
service center to determine whether the tire can be See your dealer if you ever need to have a wheel
repaired or should be replaced. To maintain your replaced, or if the sensors ever need replacement.
vehicle’s run-flat feature, all replacement tires must be
self-supporting tires. As soon as possible, contact Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
the nearest authorized GM or run-flat servicing facility valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
for inspection and repair or replacement. To locate vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would not
the nearest GM or run-flat servicing facility, call be covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealants
Roadside Assistance. For phone numbers and Roadside in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.
Service details see Roadside Service on page 8-6.
{CAUTION:
Run-flat tires are constructed differently than
other tires and could explode during improper
service. You or others could be injured or killed
if you attempt to repair, replace, dismount, or
mount a run-flat tire. Let only an authorized
run-flat service center repair, replace, dismount,
and mount run-flat tires.
6-53
Inflation - Tire Pressure A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
center pillar, below the driver’s door latch. This label
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate shows your vehicle’s original equipment tires and
effectively. the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation pressure,
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that shown on the label, is the minimum amount of air
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not. pressure needed to support your vehicle’s maximum
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation), load carrying capacity.
you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much weight
• Too much flexing your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
• Too much heat and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 5-33. How you load your vehicle affects
• Tire overloading vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
• Premature or irregular wear vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Poor handling When to Check
• Reduced fuel economy Check your tires once a month or more.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following: How to Check
• Unusual wear Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
• Poor handling inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
• Rough ride properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
• Needless damage from road hazards are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
6-54
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press Tire Pressure Monitor System
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System on your
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading vehicle, uses radio and sensor technology to check tire
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. pressure levels. Sensors, mounted on each tire and
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the wheel assembly transmit tire pressure readings to
recommended amount. a receiver located in the vehicle. The TPM sensors
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the transmit tire pressure readings once every 60 seconds
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the while the vehicle is being driven and once every
tire pressure with the tire gage. 60 minutes when the vehicle is stationary for more than
15 minutes. Using the Driver Information Center (DIC),
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. The TPM system also uses the DIC to warn the driver
when air pressure, in one or more tires, falls below
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) 25 psi (172 kPa) or is above 42 psi (290 kPa).
Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) that For additional information and details about the DIC
sends tire pressure information to the Driver Information operation and displays see DIC Controls and Displays
Center (DIC). Using the DIC control buttons, the driver on page 3-64 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
is able to check tire pressure levels in all four road tires. page 3-67.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-55 and A low tire warning light also appears on the instrument
DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-64 for additional panel cluster when a low tire condition exists. The
information. DIC message, CHECK TIRE PRESSURE and the low
tire pressure warning light will be shown each time
the engine is started and stay on until the low tire
condition is corrected.
6-55
When the tire pressure Each TPM sensor has a unique identification code that
monitoring system warning is matched to one of the four tire positions on your
light is lit, one or more vehicle. The tire and wheel assembly positions are,
of your tires is significantly left front (LF); right front (RF); right rear (RR) and left
under-inflated. rear (LR). Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires
or replace one or more TPM sensors, the identification
codes will need to be matched to the new tire and
wheel position. The TPM matching process is performed
in a specific sequence and time limit. A special tool is
You should stop and check your tires as soon as also required. See your dealer for service.
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. The SVC TIRE MONITOR message is displayed when
the TPM system is malfunctioning. For example,
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the one or more TPM sensors may be inoperable or
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation missing. See your dealer for service.
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. The TPM system operates on a radio frequency subject
Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure and with Industry and Science Canada.
as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
The Tire and Loading Information Label (tire information and with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
placard) is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, below the Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
door latch. This label shows the size of your vehicle’s (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
original tires and the correct inflation pressure for your (2) this device must accept any interference received
vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading Your including interference that may cause undesired
Vehicle on page 5-33. operation of the device.
Your vehicle’s TPM system can alert you about a low or Changes or modifications to this system by other than
high tire pressure condition but it does not replace an authorized service facility could void authorization to
normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and use this equipment.
Rotation on page 6-57
6-56
Tire Inspection and Rotation Vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system will need to have the sensors reset after a
Your vehicle’s tires should be inspected regularly for tire rotation is performed. A special tool is needed to
wear. Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate reset the sensor identification codes. See your dealer for
your tires as soon as possible and check wheel service. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. tightened. See Wheel Replacement on page 6-62
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6-58 and and “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Wheel Replacement on page 6-62 for additional Specifications on page 6-86.
information.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you change
a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
rust or dirt off.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading
information label, see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-54 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-33.
6-57
When It Is Time for New Tires Buying New Tires
One way to tell when it is GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
time for new tires is to vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
check the treadwear your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
indicators, which will General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
appear when your tires (TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
have only 1/16 inch tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
(1.6 mm) or less of the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
tread remaining. will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
You need a new tire if any of the following statements performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
are true: pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the
• You can see the indicators at three or more places tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
around the tire. design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
tire’s rubber. on page 6-48 for additional information.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
deep enough to show cord or fabric. equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
cannot be repaired well because of the size or speed capability.
location of the damage.
6-58
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
{CAUTION: are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control vehicle’s original tires.
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
(other than those originally installed on your may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
vehicle), brands, or types (radial and bias-belted spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning
you could have a crash. Using tires of different that is higher or lower than the proper warning level
sizes (other than those originally installed on you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 6-55.
your vehicle), brands or types, may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
correct size, brand, and type tires on all the Tire and Loading Information Label. This label
four wheels. is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-33 for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-59
Different Size Tires and Wheels Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its section width. For example:
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes; traction The following information relates to the system
control; and electronic stability control, the performance developed by the United States National Highway
of these systems can be affected. Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
{CAUTION: The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
may not provide an acceptable level of tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
performance and safety if tires not (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
recommended for those wheels are selected.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
You may increase the chance that you will
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM grades, they must also conform to federal safety
specific wheel and tire systems developed for requirements and additional General Motors Tire
your vehicle, and have them properly installed Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 6-58 and Accessories

and Modifications on page 6-3 for additional information.
6-60
Treadwear Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
conditions on a specified government test course. of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
depends upon the actual conditions of their use, reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
however, and may depart significantly from the norm sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and level of performance which all passenger car tires
differences in road characteristics and climate. must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
Traction – AA, A, B, C levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, the minimum required by law.
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
conditions on specified government test surfaces of overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
6-61
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for
the longest tire life and best overall performance. your vehicle.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
{CAUTION:
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
proper diagnosis. dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
Wheel Replacement air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist. with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying body and chassis.
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
6-62
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
become loose after a time. The wheel could loose and even come off. This could lead to a
come off and cause a crash. When you change crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places If you have to replace them, be sure to get new
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an GM original equipment wheel nuts.
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper
or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
rust or dirt off.
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel
nuts might come loose and the wheel could
fall off, causing a crash.
6-63
Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail without the proper amount of clearance can
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
replace a wheel, use a new GM original other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
equipment wheel. tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
6-64
Lifting Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up
is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The you could be badly injured or killed. Never get
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you under a vehicle when it is supported only
or other people. You and they could be badly by a jack.
injured. Find a level place to lift your vehicle.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever {CAUTION:
in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine. Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
move, you can put blocks in front of and
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to place
behind the wheels.
the jack in the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
6-65
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow the Lifting From the Front
instructions that came with the jack, and be sure to use
the correct lifting points to avoid damaging your vehicle.
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs
not covered by your warranty. To lift your vehicle
properly, follow the advice in this part.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using spans at least
two crossmember ribs.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
For additional information, see your GM dealer and
the Cadillac XLR service manual.
The front lifting points can be accessed from either side

of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
6-66
1. Locate the front lifting points (A), according to the 3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
illustration shown. spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
6-67
Lifting From the Rear
1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), according to the

illustration shown.
The rear lifting points can be accessed from the rear of
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
the vehicle, on either the driver’s or passenger’s side.
and the vehicle.
6-68
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to
leak out slowly. See Tires on page 6-47 for additional
information.
Your vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. This type
of tire can operate effectively with no air pressure,
so you will not need to stop on the side of the road
to change a flat tire. You can just keep on driving.
The shorter the distance you drive and the slower the
speed, the greater the chance that the run-flat tire
will not have to be replaced. Run-flat tires perform so
well without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
is used to alert you if a tire has lost pressure.
See Run-Flat Tires on page 6-52 and Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 6-55.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
For more information, see Doing Your Own Service
Work on page 6-4.
6-69
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
When the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED Special tools and procedures are required to
HNDLG message is displayed on the Driver service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and
Information Center, your vehicle’s handling procedures are not used you or others could be
capabilities will be reduced during severe injured and your vehicle could be damaged.
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could Always be sure the proper tools and
lose control of your vehicle. You or others procedures, as described in the service manual,
could be injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph are used.
(90 km/h) when the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG message is displayed.
Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
as soon as you can.
vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would not
be covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealants
If the TPM system detects a tire pressure below in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.
5 psi (34 kPa), the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, To order a service manual, see Service Publications
REDUCED HNDLG warning message is displayed on Ordering Information on page 8-14.
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Controls
and Displays on page 3-64 and DIC Warnings and If a tire goes flat, the stability control system will turn
Messages on page 3-67 for information and details on automatically even if it was disabled by the
about the DIC operation and displays. driver. When a flat tire condition exists the StabiliTrak®
system cannot be turned off. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 5-11.
6-70
Appearance Care Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the integrated
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle radio antenna and the rear window defogger.
When cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
particles from your upholstery. It is important to keep
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly. using a small brush with soft bristles.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior. odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
6-71
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners Fabric/Carpet
or techniques:
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
remove a soil from any interior surface. vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
your vehicle’s interior surfaces. For soils, always try to remove them first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively much of the soil as possible using one of the following
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure techniques:
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal. • For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry paper towel until no more can be removed.
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. • For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
Using too much soap will leave a residue that and then vacuum.
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a To clean, use the following instructions:
good guide. 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while club soda.
cleaning. 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
alcohol, etc.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
6-72
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a Other Plastic Surfaces
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
may result, clean the entire surface. remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
fabric or carpet. Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
Leather permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to or wax-based products, or those containing organic
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use in a non-uniform manner.
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently difficult to see through the windshield under certain
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are conditions.
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the Wood Panels
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather. (use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
6-73
Speaker Covers Washing Your Vehicle
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with color, gloss retention, and durability.
just water and mild soap. The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Care of Safety Belts Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Keep belts clean and dry. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.
{CAUTION: See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 6-78.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
it may severely weaken them. In a crash, agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
they might not be able to provide adequate to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
soap and lukewarm water.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for the wide rear tires and wheels, you
Weatherstrips could damage your vehicle. Verify with the manager
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last of the car wash that your vehicle will fit before
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply entering the car wash or use a touchless car wash.
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
damp weather frequent application may be required. the vehicle.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
6-74
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
page 6-74. and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
Finish Care new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
possible.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained Windshield and Wiper Blades
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
Materials on page 6-78. washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may or windshield.
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is
paint finish on your vehicle. clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
paint finish.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other replace blades that look worn.
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
6-75
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome-plated wheels. chrome wheels only.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then immediately after application.
be applied.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
wheels, you could damage the surface of the be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. carbide tire cleaning brushes.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
6-76
Tires Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
products on your vehicle may damage the paint removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
surfaces on your vehicle. protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
Sheet Metal Damage underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or do this for you.
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the Chemical Paint Spotting
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
Finish Damage attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
finish should be repaired right away.
surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
materials available from your dealer or other service
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-77
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Description Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
Description Usage Swirl Remover Polish scratches, and other light
Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior surface contamination.
Wax-Treated polishing cloth. Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax and protects finish.
Tar and Road Removes tar, road oil,
Oil Remover and asphalt. Cleans, shines, and
Foaming Tire Shine protects in one step.
Chrome Cleaner Use on chrome or Low Gloss
and Polish stainless steel. No wiping necessary.
White Sidewall Removes soil and black Medium foaming

Tire Cleaner marks from whitewalls. shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes.
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl. Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Removes dirt, grime,
Glass Cleaner smoke and fingerprints. Quickly removes spots
Spot Lifter and stains from carpets,
Removes dirt and grime vinyl, and cloth
Chrome and Wire from chrome wheels and upholstery.
Wheel Cleaner wire wheel covers.
Odorless spray odor
Removes dust, Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics,
Finish Enhancer fingerprints, and surface vinyl, leather and carpet.
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
6-78
Vehicle Identification Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) specifications, and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label

You will find this label on your spare tire cover. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label,
you will find the following:
• VIN
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on • Model designation
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on • Paint information
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also • Production options and special equipment
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
6-79
Electrical System Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Add-On Electrical Equipment Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
unless you check with your dealer first. Some breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and problem is fixed or goes away.
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other Fuses and Circuit Breakers
components from working as they should.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-44. caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
Windshield Wiper Fuses band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
size and rating. If a fuse should blow, see your dealer
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
for service immediately.
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart. If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows,
amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that
there is an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed.
you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
6-80
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Fuses Usage
The panel fuse block is located on the passenger’s side 1 Spare Fuse
of the vehicle, under the instrument panel and under 2 Spare Fuse
the toe-board.
3 Spare Fuse
Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to access
the fuse block by pulling at the top of each corner of 4 Spare Fuse
the panel. Then turn the fuse block door knob 5 Fuse Pull
counterclockwise and pull the door to access the fuses. 6 Reverse Lamp
7 Starter/Crank
8 Parking Brake Solenoid A
9 Reverse Lamps
10 BTSI Solenoid, Column Lock
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 GMLAN Devices
Rear Park Aid, Heated/Cooled Seats,
14 Windshield Wiper Relays
15 Door Locks
16 Engine Control Module
17 Interior Lights
18 Airbags
19 Not Used
6-81
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
®
20 OnStar 34 Door Controls
21 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), 35 Run, Accessory Power

Driver Door Switch
36 Not Used
Power Tilt Wheel, Telescopic Steering
22 Column, Memory Seat, Driver Seat 37 Not Used
Switch, Retractable Hardtop Switch 38 Rainsense™
23 Ignition Switch, Intrusion Sensor 39 Steering Wheel Control Button Lights
24 Stop Lamp 40 Power Lumbar
Inside Rearview Mirror, Climate 41 Passenger’s Side Heated Seat
25 Control System, Column Lock,
Power Sounder 42 Driver’s Side Heated Seat
Instrument Panel Cluster, 43 Not Used
26
Head-Up Display (HUD) 44 Retractable Hardtop, Trunk Latch
27 Radio, S-Band, CD Changer 45 Auxiliary Power
28 Tap-Up/Tap-Down Switch 46 Cigar Lighter
Climate Control System, Power 47 Park Brake Hold
29
Sounder
48 Park Brake Release
30 Rear Fog Lamps, Diagnostic Link
Connector 49 Not Used
31 Power Folding Mirror 50 Not Used
Trunk Close Button, Parking Brake 51 Not Used
32 Solenoid B 52 Fuel Door
33 Power Seats
6-82
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block
is located next to the
engine on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
For more information on
location, see Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6-12.
Fuses Usage
To access the fuses, push in the tab located at the end Anti-lock Brake System, Electronic
of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover open. 1 Suspension Control
2 Horn
3 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),

Transmission Controls
4 Windshield Wipers
5 Stop/Back-Up Lamps
6 Oxygen Sensor
7 Battery 5
6-83
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
8 Parking Lamps 25 Cooling Fan
9 Electronic Throttle Control 26 Battery 3
10 Fuel Pump 27 Anti-lock Brakes
11 Engine Control Module, Transmission 28 Climate Controls

Control Module
29 Battery 2
12 Odd Injectors
30 Starter
13 Electronic Suspension Control
31 Audio Amplifier
14 Emission Controls
32 Not Used
15 Air Conditioning Compressor
33 Battery 1
16 Even Injectors
48 Spare
17 Windshield Washer, Intercooler Pump
49 Spare
18 Headlamp Washer
50 Spare
19 Right Low Beam Headlamp
51 Spare
20 Not Used
52 Spare
21 Left Low Beam Headlamp
53 Not Used
22 Fog Lamp
54 Fuse Puller
23 Right High Beam Headlamp
24 Left High Beam Headlamp
6-84
Relays Usage Relays Usage
34 Horn 45 Windshield Wiper On/Off
35 Air Conditioning Compressor 46 Headlamp Washer
36 Windshield Washer 47 Low Beam Headlamps
37 Parking Lamps 55 Fuel Pump
38 Fog Lamps
39 High Beam Headlamps Diodes Usage
40 Rear Window Defogger § Diode 1
41 Windshield Wiper High/Low
§ Wiper Diode
42 Wiper RUN/ACCESSORY Power
§ Diode 2
43 Starter/Crank
44 Ignition 1
6-85
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11 for more information.
Capacities
Application
English Metric
Automatic Transmission
5-Speed Automatic 9.5 qt 9.0 L
Cooling System 12.6 qt 12.0 L
Engine Oil with Filter 8.0 qt 7.6 L
Fuel Tank 18.0 gal 68.0 L
Intercooler System 2.1 qt 2.0 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
4.6L V8 A Automatic 0.040 inches (1.02 mm)
6-86
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................7-2 Owner Checks and Services ............................7-8
Introduction ...................................................7-2 At Each Fuel Fill ............................................7-8
Maintenance Requirements ..............................7-2 At Least Once a Month ...................................7-8
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................7-2 At Least Once a Year .....................................7-9
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................7-2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............7-11
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................7-4 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........7-13
Additional Required Services ............................7-6 Maintenance Record .....................................7-14
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................7-7
7-1
Maintenance Schedule Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
Introduction vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
change as recommended. affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule

We at General Motors want to help you keep your
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
for details. drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Maintenance Requirements Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, Because of all the different ways people use their
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary frequent checks and replacements. So please read
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. the following and note how you drive. If you have any
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
maintenance may not be covered by warranty. see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
7-2
This schedule is for vehicles that: Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, you should have your GM Goodwrench®
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
dealer do these jobs.
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 5-33. When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal supported service technicians will perform the work
driving limits.
using genuine GM parts.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane If you want to purchase service information, see Service
on page 6-5. Publications Ordering Information on page 8-14.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-4 Owner Checks and Services on page 7-8 tells you what
should be performed when indicated. See Additional should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
Required Services on page 7-6 and Maintenance easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
Footnotes on page 7-7 for further information.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
{CAUTION: on page 7-11 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 7-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
you can be seriously injured. Do your own genuine GM parts.
maintenance work only if you have the required
know-how and the proper tools and equipment
for the job. If you have any doubt, see your
GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a qualified
technician do the work.
7-3
Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE OIL NOW message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
When the CHANGE OIL NOW message in the Driver Required services are described in the following for
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle it is recommended that your first service be
serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over may be required more often.
a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
changed at least once a year and at this time the system OIL NOW message comes on within 10 months
must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
GM-trained service technicians who will perform this performed.
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset 10 months or more since the last service or if the
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See message has not come on at all for one year.
Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
7-4
Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 6-13. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16. An Emission Control • •
Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (a). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
•
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-18. See footnote (h).
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. • •
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
• •
this section.
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (b). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (c). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (d). •
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (e). •
7-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(41 500) (83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • •
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
•
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
• • •
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-18.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
• • •
filter (severe service). See footnote (f).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
•
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
•
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
•
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (g).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. •
See footnote (j).
7-6
Maintenance Footnotes (e) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
(a) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a (f) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed. conditions:
(b) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(c) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your − Uses such as high performance operation.
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or (g) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its this service. See Engine Coolant on page 6-20 for
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. cooling system and pressure cap.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance. (h) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
(d) Lubricate the trunk key lock cylinder. Lubricate all the filter at each engine oil change.
body door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches, (j) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
including those for the hood, trunk, console door, and obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
any folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication
may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak.
7-7
Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
dependability, and emission control performance of your on page 6-20 for further details.
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
with these checks and services.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your necessary.
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at Visually inspect your tires for wear and make sure tires
each fuel fill. are inflated to the correct pressures. See Tires on
page 6-47 for further details.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 6-13 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
7-8
At Least Once a Year Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
around the vehicle. surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29. on page 2-29.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
turn off the engine immediately if it starts. the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle 3. With the engine off and without applying the regular
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service. of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
7-9
Parking Brake and Transmission Park (P) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
Mechanism Check downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
{CAUTION: With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
When you are doing this check, your vehicle held by the parking brake only.
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
Make sure there is room in front of your
release the parking brake followed by the regular
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to brake.
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move. Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
7-10
Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, System Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
part number, or specification may be obtained from page 6-20.
your dealer.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Usage Fluid/Lubricant System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
The engine requires a special GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
engine oil meeting GM Standard Washer
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
synthetic, and should also be System in Canada 89021186).
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified DEXRON®-III Automatic
for Gasoline Engines starburst Automatic Transmission Fluid. Look for
Engine Oil symbol. However, not all synthetic Transmission “Approved for the H-Specification”
API oils with the starburst symbol on the label.
will meet this GM standard.
You should look for and use only
an oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. GM Goodwrench® oil
meets all the requirements for your
vehicle. For the proper viscosity,
see Engine Oil on page 6-13.
7-11
Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Trunk Key Lock Multi-Purpose

(GM Part No.
Lubricant, Superlube
U.S. 12346241,
Hood Latch
Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Cylinder
in Canada 10953474). Secondary (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, and Release Category LB or GC-LB.
in Canada 10953455) meeting Pawl
Rear Axle GM Specification 9986115.
With a complete drain and refill Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Limited-Slip add 4 ounces (118 ml) of Hood and
Differential) (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive Door Hinges
in Canada 10953474).
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358,
in Canada 992694) where required. Dielectric Silicone Grease
Weatherstrip (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
See Rear Axle on page 6-42. Conditioning
in Canada 992887).
7-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Elements 25099149 A1208C
Engine Oil Filter
4.6 L V8 Engine 89017342 PF61
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 10345066 CF131C
Spark Plugs
4.6 L V8 Engine 12571533 41-986
Wiper Blade – 19.7 inches (50 cm) 12367281 —
7-13
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 7-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 7-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II
7-14
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
7-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
7-16
Section 8 Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............8-2 Reporting Safety Defects ................................8-13
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................8-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ......................................8-3 United States Government ..........................8-13
Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................8-4 Canadian Government ................................8-14
Customer Assistance Offices ............................8-4 Reporting Safety Defects to
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................8-5 General Motors .........................................8-14
Roadside Service ...........................................8-6 Service Publications Ordering Information .........8-14
Courtesy Transportation ...................................8-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ..................................................8-9
Collision Damage Repair ................................8-10
8-1
Customer Assistance and We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
Information the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Satisfaction Procedure • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is

available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns visible through the windshield.
with the sales transaction or the operation of your • Dealership name and location.
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of have a concern.
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
are committed to making sure you are completely
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
manager.
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
management, it appears your concern cannot be rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact Plan (CAMVAP).
the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre
by calling 1-888-446-2000.
8-2
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program Online Owner Center
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
Although you may be required to resort to this informal one place.
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree • Get e-mail service reminders.
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and • Access information about your specific vehicle,
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
including tips and videos and an electronic
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the • Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
following address: maintenance schedule.
BBB Auto Line Program • Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard • Receive special promotions and privileges only
Suite 800 available to members (United States only).
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Refer to the web for updated information.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
This program is available in all 50 states and the (United States) or My GM Canada within
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
8-3
Customer Assistance for Text From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
Telephone (TTY) Users 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), From U.S. Virgin Islands:
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer 1-800-496-9994
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate Fax Number: 313-381-0022
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Offices Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, 163-005
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
to write or e-mail Cadillac, refer to the addresses below.
1-888-446-2000
United States — Customer Assistance 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
8-4
Overseas — Customer Assistance GM Mobility Reimbursement
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit. Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares This program, available to qualified applicants, can
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
01-800-508-0000 aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
8-5
Roadside Service Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
technician who can provide on-site service. following situations:
Each technician travels with a specially equipped • Towing Service
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac • Battery Jump Starting
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
• Lock Out Assistance
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
• Fuel Delivery
This service is provided at no charge for any situation • Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
covered by the base warranty coverage and at a • Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due to
nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer covered by a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be
the base warranty. Roadside Service is available only in reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
the United States and Canada. (80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered
are hotel, meals, and rental car.
Roadside Service Availability

Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada,
an advisor is available to assist you over the phone.
A dealer technician, if available, can travel to your
location within a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating
Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we will
arrange to have your car towed to the nearest
Cadillac dealership.
8-6
Reaching Roadside Service Courtesy Transportation
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number: To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
assist you and request the following information: Transportation, a customer support program for
• A description of the problem new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
• Name, home address, home telephone number customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
calling from Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number inconvenience during warranty repairs.
(VIN), mileage, and date of delivery
Roadside Service for the Hearing or Scheduling Service Appointments

Speech Impaired When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment.
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillac has service consultant of your transportation needs, your
installed special telecommunication devices called dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours. let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
8-7
Transportation Options Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
your dealer can offer you one of the following: amount per day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
Shuttle Service agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
service to get you to your destination with minimal
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
usage charges and may also be responsible for
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
Reimbursement a courtesy rental.
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, reimbursement
of public transportation expenses may be available,
for up to a maximum of five days. In addition, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be
available, up to a five-day maximum. Claim amounts
should reflect actual costs and be supported by original
receipts.
8-8
Additional Program Information Vehicle Data Collection and
Courtesy Transportation is available during the Event Data Recorders
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
provides detailed warranty coverage information. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
contact your dealer for specific information about Some information may be stored during regular
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. other information is stored only in a crash event by
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during computer systems, such as those commonly called
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General event data recorders (EDR).
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
alternative transportation may be available under the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult may record information about the condition of the vehicle
your dealer for details. and how it was operated, such as data related to engine
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle is equipped
pursuant to the terms and conditions described with StabiliTrak®, steering performance, including yaw
herein at its sole discretion. rate, steering wheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is
also recorded. This information has been used to improve
vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
8-9
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as the special equipment that can read the information
conversation of vehicle occupants. if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the data is required. GM will not access information the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
about a crash event or share it with others other than: for information on its operations and data collection.
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee, Collision Damage Repair
• in response to an official request of police or similar If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
government office, have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
discovery process, or Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
• as required by law. compromised in subsequent collisions.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
Collision Parts
• use the data for GM research needs,
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
• make it available for research where appropriate same materials and construction methods as the parts
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
shown, or Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
purposes. maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
8-10
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for Insuring Your Vehicle
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most cases, Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, There are significant differences in the quality of
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
originally designed appearance and safety performance, Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
however, the history of these parts is not known. to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
covered by that warranty. collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
made by companies other than GM and may not have insurance coverage is not available from your current
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may insurance carrier, consider switching to another
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, insurance carrier.
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
to such parts are not covered by that warranty. Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Repair Facility Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
8-11
If an Accident Occurs • Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured. policy number, and a general description of the
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not damage to the other vehicle.
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have • If possible, call your insurance company from the
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to information they will need. If they ask for a police
move it by a police officer. report, phone or go to the police department
• Give only the necessary and requested information headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
to police and other parties involved in the accident. of the report for a nominal fee. In some states with
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This necessary. This is especially true if there are no
will help guard against post-accident legal action. injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside • Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
Assistance. See Roadside Service on page 8-6 for vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a private
more information. collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the you are comfortable with them. Remember, you will
have to feel comfortable with their work for a
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
long time.
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number. • Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is make sure you understand what work will be
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
information and registration if you keep these items ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
in your vehicle. this opportunity.
8-12
Managing the Vehicle Damage Reporting Safety Defects
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, Reporting Safety Defects to the
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
United States Government
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
Specify to the facility that any required replacement cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your General Motors.
GM vehicle warranty.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
insurance company may initially value the repair using campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember General Motors.
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost. Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision Washington, D.C. 20590
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with You can also obtain other information about motor
that company. In such cases, you can have control of vehicle safety from the hotline.
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
8-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000.
Or, write:
Canadian Government Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle Centre, 163-005
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify General Motors of Canada Limited
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada Service Publications Ordering
Place de Ville Tower C Information
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 Service Manuals
Reporting Safety Defects to Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
General Motors brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Case Unit Repair Manual
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center This manual provides information on unit repair service
Cadillac Motor Car Division procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
P.O. Box 33169 GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
8-14
Service Bulletins Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information Service Publications are available for current and
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE Eastern Time
(1-800-463-7483). For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
Owner’s Information World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Owner publications are written specifically for owners Or you can write to:
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include Helm, Incorporated
the Maintenance Schedule for all models. P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
Warranty Booklet.
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-15
✍ NOTES
8-16
A Airbag System (cont.)
Antenna, Diversity Antenna System ................... 3-86
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 6-3 Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ..... 3-86
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-40 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 5-7
Adaptive Cruise Control ................................... 3-15 Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-55
Adaptive Forward Lighting System ..................... 3-31 Appearance Care
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 6-76
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-44 Care of Safety Belts .................................... 6-74
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 6-6 Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 6-77
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 6-80 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 6-75
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 6-18 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 6-71
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-41 Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 6-72
Airbag Finish Care ................................................. 6-75
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-52 Finish Damage ............................................ 6-77
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-51 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ......... 8-9 Surfaces ................................................. 6-73
Airbag System ................................................ 1-32 Leather ...................................................... 6-73
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 6-77
Vehicle ................................................... 1-44 Speaker Covers .......................................... 6-74
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-38 Tires .......................................................... 6-77
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-40 Underbody Maintenance ............................... 6-77
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-44 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 6-78
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-38 Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 6-74
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-39 Weatherstrips .............................................. 6-74
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-37 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 6-75
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-34 Wood Panels .............................................. 6-73
1
Ashtray(s) ...................................................... 3-41 Brake
Audio System ................................................. 4-51 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 5-7
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-82 Emergencies ................................................ 5-9
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-84 Parking ...................................................... 2-29
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-86 System Warning Light .................................. 3-54
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-86 Brakes .......................................................... 6-33
Diversity Antenna System ............................. 3-86 Braking ........................................................... 5-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-84 Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 5-9
Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-85 Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-20
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-86 Bulb Replacement ........................................... 6-45
Automatic Door Lock ....................................... 2-11 Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 6-43
Automatic Transmission Buying New Tires ........................................... 6-58
Fluid .......................................................... 6-19
Operation ................................................... 2-25
Avoid Point/Area, Edit ...................................... 4-25 C
California Fuel .................................................. 6-5
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 6-3
B Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Battery .......................................................... 6-36 Capacities and Specifications ............................ 6-86
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-33 Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-12, 2-33, 5-27, 5-37
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-34 Care of
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 5-24 Safety Belts ................................................ 6-74
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-86
Your CDs ................................................... 3-86
2
CD Cleaning (cont.)
Player ........................................................ 4-69 Leather ...................................................... 6-73
Six-Disc Changer ......................................... 4-66 Speaker Covers .......................................... 6-74
CD/DVD Player .............................................. 4-69 Tires .......................................................... 6-77
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-44 Underbody Maintenance ............................... 6-77
Chains, Tire ................................................... 6-64 Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 6-74
Check Weatherstrips .............................................. 6-74
Engine Light ............................................... 3-58 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 6-75
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 6-10 Wood Panels .............................................. 6-73
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 6-77 Climate Control System
Child Restraints Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-47
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-23 Dual .......................................................... 3-41
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-20 Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-47
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-27 Collision Damage Repair .................................. 8-10
Older Children ............................................. 1-18 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 5-6
Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger Convenience Net ............................................ 2-46
Seat Position ........................................... 1-28 Coolant
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-41 Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-57
Cleaning Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-24
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 6-76 Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 6-23
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 6-75 Cooled Seats ................................................... 1-3
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 6-72 Cooling System .............................................. 6-26
Finish Care ................................................. 6-75 Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-33
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 6-71 Cruise Control ................................................ 3-12
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Cruise Control, Adaptive .................................. 3-15
Surfaces ................................................. 6-73
3
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-44 Door
Customer Assistance Information Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-11
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 8-7 Locks .......................................................... 2-9
Customer Assistance for Text Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 8-4 Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-12
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 8-4 Driver
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 8-2 Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-10
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 8-5 Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-64
Reporting Safety Defects to DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-64
General Motors ........................................ 8-14 DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-78
Reporting Safety Defects to the DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-67
Canadian Government .............................. 8-14 Other Messages .......................................... 3-77
Reporting Safety Defects to the Driving
United States Government ......................... 8-13 At Night ..................................................... 5-18
Roadside Service .......................................... 8-6 City ........................................................... 5-22
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 8-14 Defensive ..................................................... 5-2
Drunken ....................................................... 5-3
Freeway ..................................................... 5-23
D Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 5-26
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 5-20
Database Coverage Explanations ...................... 4-50
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 5-32
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-30
Winter ........................................................ 5-27
Defensive Driving ............................................. 5-2
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-41
Diversity Antenna System ................................. 3-86
DVD
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 6-4
Player ........................................................ 4-69
4
E Engine (cont.)
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 6-25
Edit Overheating ................................................ 6-23
Avoid Point/Area .......................................... 4-25 Starting ...................................................... 2-22
Memory Point ............................................. 4-19 Enter Destination ............................................ 4-27
Waypoint .................................................... 4-23 Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-33
Electrical System Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 8-9
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 6-80 Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-17
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 6-80 Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-28
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 6-81 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-33
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 6-80
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 6-83
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Engine
6-80 F
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 6-18 Filter
Battery ....................................................... 6-36 Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 6-18
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-58 Finish Damage ............................................... 6-77
Coolant ...................................................... 6-20 Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-24 Flat Tire ........................................................ 6-69
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-57 Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-45
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 6-12 Fluid
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-33 Automatic Transmission ................................ 6-19
Oil ............................................................. 6-13 Power Steering ........................................... 6-31
Oil Life System ........................................... 6-16 Windshield Washer ...................................... 6-32
Oil Pressure Gage ....................................... 3-61 Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-62
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-31
5
Fuel ............................................................... 6-5 Gasoline
Additives ...................................................... 6-6 Octane ........................................................ 6-5
California Fuel .............................................. 6-5 Specifications ............................................... 6-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 6-10 Getting Started
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 6-7 Getting Started, Navigation ............................. 4-4
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 6-6 Global Positioning System (GPS) ...................... 4-48
Gage ......................................................... 3-63 Glove Box ..................................................... 2-44
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 6-5 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 8-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 6-5
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 6-80
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 6-81
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 6-83
Headlamp
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 6-80
Aiming ....................................................... 6-43
Vertical Aiming ............................................ 6-44
Headlamps
G Adaptive Forward Lighting System ................. 3-31
Gage Bulb Replacement ....................................... 6-45
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-57 Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-30
Engine Oil Pressure ..................................... 3-61 Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Fuel .......................................................... 3-63 High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Speedometer .............................................. 3-50 On Reminder .............................................. 3-29
Tachometer ................................................. 3-50 Washer ...................................................... 3-11
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-54 Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-29
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-39 Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-34
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
6
Heater ........................................................... 3-41
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-62 K
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 5-25 Keyless Access System ............................. 2-4, 4-47
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 5-26 Keyless Access System, Operation ...................... 2-5
Hood Keys ............................................................... 2-2
Checking Things Under ................................ 6-10
Release ..................................................... 6-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 6-48
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-10 Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ......................... 3-34
Courtesy .................................................... 3-33
I Exterior ...................................................... 3-28
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-21 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-33
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-20 Fog ........................................................... 3-31
Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 6-54 Reading ..................................................... 3-33
Instrument Panel Twilight Sentinel® ........................................ 3-32
Overview ..................................................... 3-4 LATCH System
Instrument Panel (I/P) Child Restraints ........................................... 1-27
Brightness .................................................. 3-33 Lifting Your Vehicle, Tires ................................. 6-65
Cluster ....................................................... 3-49 Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-51
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-55
J Brake System Warning .................................
Fog Lamp ..................................................
3-54
3-62
Jump Starting ................................................. 6-37 Highbeam On ............................................. 3-62
7
Light (cont.)
Lights On Reminder ..................................... 3-62 M
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-58 Magnetic Ride Control ..................................... 5-11
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-52 Maintenance Schedule
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-50 Additional Required Services ........................... 7-6
Security ..................................................... 3-62 At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 7-8
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-56 At Least Once a Month .................................. 7-8
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-57 At Least Once a Year .................................... 7-9
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-56 Introduction .................................................. 7-2
Lighting Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 7-7
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-33 Maintenance Record .................................... 7-14
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ..................................... 5-11 Maintenance Requirements ............................. 7-2
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-33 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 7-13
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12 Owner Checks and Services ........................... 7-8
Locks Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 7-11
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-11 Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 7-4
Door ........................................................... 2-9 Using .......................................................... 7-2
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 7-2
Power Door ................................................ 2-11 Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-58
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-12 Map Pocket ................................................... 2-44
Loss of Control ............................................... 5-17 Maps ............................................................ 4-38
Lowering the Retractable Hardtop ...................... 2-47 Memory Mirrors .............................................. 2-56
Lumbar Memory Point, Edit ......................................... 4-19
Power Controls ............................................. 1-2 Memory Seat ................................................. 2-56
Memory Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 2-56
Menu
Setup ........................................................ 4-13
8
Message Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 6-16
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-67 Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-18
Mirrors Online Owner Center ........................................ 8-3
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ....... 2-34 OnStar® System ............................................. 4-47
Memory ..................................................... 2-56 OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-37
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-35 Ordering
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-36 Map DVDs ................................................. 4-50
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-36 Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-35 Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-47
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 8-3 Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-35
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-36
N Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-36
Navigation ................................................. 4-2, 4-4 Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-35
Using the System ........................................ 4-10 Overheated Engine Protection
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-20 Operating Mode .......................................... 6-25
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 7-13 Owner Checks and Services .............................. 7-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-50 P
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-50 Park Aid ........................................................ 3-38
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 5-15 Park (P)
Oil Shifting Into ................................................ 2-30
Engine ....................................................... 6-13 Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-32
Engine Oil Pressure Gage ............................ 3-61
Life Indicator ............................................... 3-82
9
Parking
Assist ........................................................ 3-38 Q
Brake ........................................................ 2-29 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .......... 1-9
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-32
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-52
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-47
Passenger Position, Safety Belts ....................... 1-17
R
Radio ............................................................ 4-51
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-40 Personalization with Home and
Passing ......................................................... 5-16 Away Feature .......................................... 4-74
Plan Route .................................................... 4-18 Radios .......................................................... 3-82
Power Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-86
Accessory Outlet(s) ...................................... 3-40 Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-86
Door Locks ................................................. 2-11 Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-84
Electrical System ......................................... 6-80 Understanding Reception .............................. 3-85
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-2 Rainsense™ Wipers ........................................ 3-10
Reclining Seatback ........................................ 1-4 Raising the Retractable Hardtop ........................ 2-48
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-22 Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-33
Seat ............................................................ 1-2 Rear Axle ...................................................... 6-42
Steering Fluid ............................................. 6-31 Limited-Slip ................................................. 5-11
Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ....... 3-6 Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-45
Windows .................................................... 2-16 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-17 OnStar® ..................................................... 2-34
Problems with Route Guidance ......................... 4-50 Reclining Seatback, Power ................................. 1-4
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............... 2-12 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 7-11
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 5-37
Replacement, Windshield ................................. 6-46
10
Reporting Safety Defects Safety Belts (cont.)
Canadian Government .................................. 8-14 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-10
General Motors ........................................... 8-14 Passenger Position ...................................... 1-17
United States Government ............................ 8-13 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ....... 1-9
Restraint System Check Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-17
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-45 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-16
Replacing Restraint System Parts Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-5
After a Crash .......................................... 1-46 Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-22 Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 7-4
Retractable Hardtop ........................................ 2-46 Seats
Lowering .................................................... 2-47 Heated and Cooled Seats .............................. 1-3
Raising ...................................................... 2-48 Memory ..................................................... 2-56
Roadside Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-2
Service ........................................................ 8-6 Power Reclining Seatback .............................. 1-4
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 5-32 Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Route Preference ............................................ 4-36 Securing a Child Restraint
Run-Flat Tires ................................................ 6-52 Passenger Seat Position ............................... 1-28
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-33 Security Light ................................................. 3-62
Service ........................................................... 6-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 6-3
S Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 6-4
Safety Belt
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 6-3
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-17
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 6-4
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-50
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-58
Safety Belts
Publications Ordering Information ................... 8-14
Care of ...................................................... 6-74
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-44
Driver Position ............................................ 1-10
11
Setup Menu ................................................... 4-13
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 6-77 T
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-30 Tachometer .................................................... 3-50
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-32 TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-56
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7 Telescopic Steering Column,
Six-Disc CD Changer ...................................... 4-66 Power Tilt Wheel ........................................... 3-6
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 6-86 Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-84
Speedometer .................................................. 3-50 Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-18
StabiliTrak® System ......................................... 5-11 Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-18
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-22 Tire
Steering ........................................................ 5-13 Pressure Light ............................................. 3-57
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-84 Tires ............................................................. 6-47
Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ..................... 2-56 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and Cleaning ................................................. 6-76
Telescopic Steering Column ............................ 3-6 Buying New Tires ........................................ 6-58
Storage Areas Chains ....................................................... 6-64
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-44 Cleaning .................................................... 6-77
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-46 Different Size .............................................. 6-60
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-44 If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 6-69
Glove Box .................................................. 2-44 Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 6-54
Map Pocket ................................................ 2-44 Inspection and Rotation ................................ 6-57
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-45 Lifting Your Vehicle ...................................... 6-65
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 5-32 Pressure Monitor System .............................. 6-55
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-18 Run-Flat ..................................................... 6-52
Symbols ........................................................ 4-42 Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 6-48
System Needs Service, If ................................. 4-50 Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 6-50
System Overview Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 6-60
Overview, Navigation System .......................... 4-2
12
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 6-62 U
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 6-62 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 3-38
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 6-58 Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-85
Towing Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 6-60
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 5-37 Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-39
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 5-37 Operation ................................................... 2-40
Your Vehicle ............................................... 5-37
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 5-9
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-56
V
Valet Lockout Switch ....................................... 2-20
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................. 5-11 Vehicle
Magnetic Ride Control .................................. 5-11 Control ........................................................ 5-6
StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 5-11 Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Transmission Loading ...................................................... 5-33
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 6-19 Symbols ......................................................... iv
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-25 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Trip Computer Recorders .................................................... 8-9
Oil Life Indicator .......................................... 3-82 Vehicle Identification
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-50 Number (VIN) ............................................. 6-79
Trunk ............................................................ 2-12 Service Parts Identification Label ................... 6-79
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7 Vehicle Personalization .................................... 2-56
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7 DIC ........................................................... 3-78
Twilight Sentinel® ............................................ 3-32 Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel ...... 2-56
13
Vehicle Positioning .......................................... 4-49 Windshield
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-47 Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 6-75
Visors ........................................................... 2-18 Windshield Replacement .................................. 6-46
Voice Recognition ........................................... 4-75 Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-11
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-54 Fluid .......................................................... 6-32
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 6-46
W Fuses ........................................................ 6-80
Rainsense™ Wipers ..................................... 3-10
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-48
Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9
Warnings
Winter Driving ................................................ 5-27
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-67
Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-29
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv X
Waypoint, Edit ................................................ 4-23 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-86
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 6-62
Different Size .............................................. 6-60
Replacement ............................................... 6-62
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 7-2
Windows ....................................................... 2-15
Power ........................................................ 2-16
14

2k06xlr

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2k06xlr

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2k06xlr

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2006 Cadillac XLR Owner Manual M

Power Seats • Press the vertical control rearward to recline the

• Move the front of the horizontal control up or down

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,

Infants and Young Children

The system checks the airbag electrical system for

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the

The passenger’s side impact airbag is in the side of the

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator − Canada

The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Your vehicle has a keyless access system with

G (Trunk): Press this button to open the trunk

If you are outside the vehicle, there is a door release

Automatic Door Lock

To stop the trunk lid while it is closing, do one of the

Press the button to open the trunk. To use this feature,

If the vehicle has lost

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release

Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature Express Window Anti-Pinch Override

Cleaning the Mirror

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror

Buttons 1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home

There is a cargo divider located in the trunk to keep

Notice: Raising or lowering the top while the vehicle

Steering Wheel A second mirror, seating and steering wheel position

Your vehicle is equipped with the memory package.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what

The lever on the left side of the steering column

9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the

The cruise symbol on the

Press the top of the button to increase the distance or

The lens is located on the driver’s side of the front fascia.

O (Off): Turning the band to this position turns off all

If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in

+!- (Brightness): This button is used to adjust the

United States shown, Canada similar

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-55 for

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.

United States Only

If moving the transmitter to different locations within

FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals

The SETUP MENU allows you to adjust such things as

2D: Select this feature to display the map as a

Registering Memory Points

A marked point is a memory point which has been Home Memory

You may set up to five waypoints on the way to your

You must have destinations stored as memory

1. Press the ROUTE key.

4. Select the desired region by touching the